You are on page 1of 272

PC300 MD300 AT Command Manual

The AT Command Manual describes the AT Commands that are supported in the PC300 PC Card and MD300 Broadband USB Modem.

The information contained in this document is the proprietary information of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International. The contents are employees, agents or subcontractors of the owner or licensee of this Communications International, is strictly prohibited. confidential and any disclosure to persons other than the officers, document, without the prior written consent of Sony Ericsson Mobile

Further, no portion of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a mechanical, including photocopying and recording, without the prior written consent copyright holder.

retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International, the

First Edition (July 2007)

Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International publishes this manual without making any warranty as to the content contained herein. Further, Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International reserves the right to

make modifications, additions and deletions to this manual due to typographical errors, inaccurate information, or improvements to programs nevertheless be incorporated into new editions of this manual. and/or equipment at any time and without notice. Such changes will,

All rights reserved. Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International, 2008 Publication number: 1202-6404 Rev. 2 Printed in United States of America

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 2 of 272

Table of Contents
1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 Introduction to AT Commands ............................................................................ 9 Related Documentation ....................................................................................... 9 Overview ............................................................................................................. 9 History of Core Module AT Commands Manuals .................................................. 9 Syntax Description .............................................................................................. 9 Examples on How to Use the AT Commands...................................................... 12 GPRS Communication ........................................................................................ 12 Abortability ....................................................................................................... 13 Call Control....................................................................................................... 15 ATA Answer Incoming Call ............................................................................... 15 ATD Dial .......................................................................................................... 15 ATD Extension (*99) - Request Packet Domain Service ...................................... 19 ATD Extension (*98) - Request Packet Domain IP Service ................................... 20 ATH Hang up ................................................................................................... 22 ATO Return to Online Data Mode...................................................................... 22 ATP Select Pulse dialing..................................................................................... 23 ATT Select Tone Dialing .................................................................................... 23 ATX Call Progress Monitoring Control............................................................... 23 AT+CHUP Hang up Call ..................................................................................... 24 AT+CLCC List Current Calls............................................................................... 24 Control and Status ............................................................................................ 27 ATS0 Automatic Answer Control........................................................................ 27 ATS2 Escape Sequence Character ..................................................................... 27 ATS3 Command Line Termination Character..................................................... 28 ATS4 Response Formatting Character ............................................................... 28 ATS5 Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE) ........................................ 29 ATS6 Blind Dial Delay Control........................................................................... 30 ATS7 Connection Completion Timeout ............................................................. 30 ATS8 Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control .......................................................... 31 ATS10 Automatic Disconnect Delay Control....................................................... 31 AT+CEER Extended Error Report........................................................................ 32 AT+CIND Indicator Control ............................................................................... 32 AT* List all Supported AT Commands ................................................................ 35 AT+CLAC List All Available AT Commands ........................................................ 35 AT+CMEE Mobile Equipment Error..................................................................... 36 +CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)..................................................... 36

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 3 of 272

3.16 3.17 3.18 3.19 3.20 3.21 3.22 3.23 4 4.1 4.2 4.3 5 5.1 5.2 5.3 6 6.1 7 7.1 7.2 8 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11 8.12 8.13 8.14

AT+CMER Mobile Equipment Event Reporting.................................................... 39 +CMS ERROR (Message Service Failure Result Code) .......................................... 41 AT+CPAS Phone Activity Status ......................................................................... 42 AT+CPWD Change Password ............................................................................. 43 AT+CR Service Reporting Control ...................................................................... 44 AT+CRC Cellular Result Code ............................................................................ 46 AT+CSQ Signal Strength.................................................................................... 47 AT*ECAM Call Monitoring .................................................................................. 48 Operational Control and Status.......................................................................... 53 AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality ..................................................................... 53 AT*E2RESET Restart Module ............................................................................. 54 AT+CMAR Master Reset .................................................................................... 54 Profiles ............................................................................................................. 56 AT&F Set to Factory Defined Configuration Profile ............................................ 56 AT&W Store Configuration Profile ...................................................................... 63 ATZ Restore Configuration Profile .................................................................... 63 Time Commands ............................................................................................... 65 AT+CCLK Set Clock and Date ............................................................................ 65 Data - CSD........................................................................................................ 66 AT+CBST Select Bearer Service Type ................................................................. 66 AT+CRLP Radio Link Protocol ........................................................................... 67 Data - GPRS ...................................................................................................... 70 AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate ............................................... 70 AT+CGCMOD PDP Context Modify................................................................... 71 AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach .................................................................. 71 AT+CGCLASS GPRS Mobile Station Class........................................................... 72 AT+CGDATA Enter Data State........................................................................... 73 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context................................................................... 74 AT+CGDSCONT Define Secondary PDP Context ................................................ 77 AT+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting.................................................................... 79 AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address..................................................................... 81 AT+CGEQMIN 3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) .................... 82 AT+CGEQNEG 3G Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated) ................................... 90 AT+CGEQREQ 3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested) .................................... 94 AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable) .......................... 99 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested) ......................................... 100

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 4 of 272

8.15 8.16 8.17 8.18 9 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9 9.10 9.11 9.12 9.13 9.14 9.15 9.16 9.17 9.18 9.19

AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status................................................ 101 AT+CGTFT Traffic Flow Template .................................................................. 104 AT*ENAP USB Ethernet Interface Control ......................................................... 108 AT*EUPLINK Send Uplink Data ........................................................................ 109 Internet Accounts............................................................................................ 111 AT*EIAAUR - Internet Account Configuration, Read Authentication Parameters 111 AT*EIAAUW - Internet Account Configuration, Write Authentication Parameters112 AT*EIAC - Internet Account, Create ................................................................. 114 AT*EIACSR - Internet Account Configuration, Read CSD Bearer Capabilities ..... 115 AT*EIACSW - Internet Account Configuration, Write CSD Bearer Capabilities .... 117 AT*EIAD - Internet Account Configuration, Delete ........................................... 118 AT*EIALCPR - Internet Account Configuration, Read PPP Parameters - LCP ...... 119 AT*EIALCPW - Internet Account Configuration, Write PPP Parameters - LCP ..... 122 AT*EIALSR - Internet Account Configuration, Read Link Socket Parameters...... 125 AT*EIALSW - Internet Account Configuration, Write Link Socket Parameters..... 126 AT*EIAIPCPR - Internet Account Configuration, Read PPP Parameters - IPCP .... 127 AT*EIAIPCPW - Internet Account Configuration, Write PPP Parameters - IPCP ... 129 AT*EIAPSW - Internet Account Configuration, Write PS Bearer Parameters ........ 131 AT*EIAPSR - Internet Account Configuration, Read PS Bearer Parameters ......... 133 AT*EIAR - Internet Account Configuration, Read General Parameters ............... 135 AT*EIAW - Internet Account Configuration, Write General Parameters.............. 136 AT*EIARUTR - Internet Account Configuration, Read Routing Table Parameters137 AT*EIARUTW - Internet Account Configuration, Write Routing Table Parameters139 AT*EIARUTD - Internet Account Configuration, Delete Routing Table Parameters...................................................................................................... 140 Identification................................................................................................... 143 AT Attention Command.................................................................................. 143 AT+CGMI Read MS Manufacturer Identification................................................ 143 AT+CGMM Read MS Model Identification ......................................................... 143 AT+CGMR Read Revision Identification............................................................ 144 AT+CGSN Read Product Serial Number Identification ....................................... 144 AT+GCAP Capabilities .................................................................................... 145 AT+GMI Request Manufacturer Identification.................................................. 145 AT+GMM Request Model Identification ........................................................... 146 AT+GMR Revision Identification ..................................................................... 146 ATI Identification Information......................................................................... 147 Serial Interface ................................................................................................ 150

10 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9 10.10 11

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 5 of 272

11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 12 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 13 13.1 13.2 13.3 14 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7 14.8 14.9 14.10 14.11 14.12 14.13 14.14 14.15

AT&C Circuit 109 (DCD) Control ..................................................................... 150 AT&D Circuit 108 (DTR) Response .................................................................. 150 ATV DCE Response Format ............................................................................. 151 AT+ICF DTE-DCE Character Framing Format ................................................... 152 AT+IFC DTE-DCE Local Flow Control ............................................................... 153 AT+IPR Cable Interface Port baud rate............................................................. 154 ATE Command Echo ....................................................................................... 155 ATQ Result Code Suppression ........................................................................ 156 Network .......................................................................................................... 157 AT*E2EMM Engineering Monitoring Mode ..................................................... 157 AT*ERINFO Network Capability ....................................................................... 164 AT+CLCK Facility Lock ................................................................................... 165 AT+CNUM Subscriber Number ...................................................................... 168 AT+COPN Read Operator Names ................................................................... 170 AT+COPS Operator Selection.......................................................................... 171 AT+CPOL Preferred Operator List ................................................................... 173 AT+CREG Network Registration...................................................................... 175 Phonebook...................................................................................................... 178 AT+CPBR Phonebook Read ............................................................................. 178 AT+CPBS Phonebook Storage Select .............................................................. 180 AT+CPBW Phonebook Write ............................................................................ 181 Short Message Services - Point to Point ........................................................... 184 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages............................................ 184 AT+CMGF Message Format ............................................................................ 184 AT+CMGW Write Message to Memory ............................................................. 185 AT+CMGC Send Command............................................................................. 186 AT+CMGS Send Message................................................................................ 188 AT+CMSS Send From Storage ......................................................................... 189 AT+CMGD Delete Message............................................................................. 190 AT+CMGL List Message.................................................................................. 191 AT+CMGR Read Message ............................................................................... 193 AT +CMMS More Messages to Send ................................................................. 195 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE ....................................................... 195 AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage ............................................................. 201 AT+CSCA Service Centre Address................................................................... 203 AT+CSCS Select Character Set ........................................................................ 204 AT+CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters .............................................................. 205

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 6 of 272

14.16 14.17 14.18 14.19 15 15.1 15.2 16 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 16.6 16.7 16.8 16.9 17 17.1 17.2 17.3 17.4 18 18.1 18.2 18.3 18.4 18.5 18.6 18.7 18.8 18.9 18.10 18.11 19 19.1

AT+CSMS Select Message Service ................................................................... 206 AT*E2CMGA Modify message attribute ........................................................... 207 AT+CRES Restore SMS Settings........................................................................ 208 AT+CSAS Save SMS Settings ............................................................................ 209 Short Message Services - Cell Broadcast .......................................................... 210 AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Type ................................................ 210 AT*EMWI Message Waiting Indication............................................................... 211 SIM Commands ............................................................................................... 213 AT+CRSM Restricted SIM Access.................................................................... 213 AT+CPIN PIN Control..................................................................................... 216 AT*EPEE Pin Event ......................................................................................... 218 AT*E2SSN SIM Serial Number ......................................................................... 219 AT+CIMI Subscriber Identification ................................................................. 219 AT*EPIN Additional PIN Information ............................................................... 220 AT+CEAP EAP Authentication ......................................................................... 221 AT+CERP EAP Retrieve Parameters.................................................................. 223 AT+CUAD UICC Application Discovery............................................................ 224 SIM Application Toolkit ................................................................................... 225 AT*ESTKMENU Menu Selection........................................................................ 225 AT*ESTKRES Terminal Response .................................................................... 225 AT*ESTKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings ................................................... 228 SIM Toolkit Unsolicited Result Codes ............................................................... 229 Supplementary Services................................................................................... 247 AT+COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation ...................................... 247 AT+CACM Accumulated Call Meter.................................................................. 248 AT+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum ................................................ 249 AT+CAOC Advice of Charge ............................................................................ 250 AT+CPUC Price Per Unit and Currency Table.................................................... 251 AT+CCFC Call Forwarding number and Conditions .......................................... 252 AT+CCWA Call Waiting.................................................................................... 254 AT+CLIP Calling Line Identification.................................................................. 256 AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction ................................................ 259 AT+CSSN Supplementary Service Notification .................................................. 260 AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data ....................................... 263 Alternate Line Services .................................................................................... 268 AT*ECSP Customer Service Profile................................................................... 268

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 7 of 272

20

Alphabetic Listing of AT Commands ................................................................ 269

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 8 of 272

Introduction to AT Commands
This manual lists detailed information on the function of the AT Command set that can be used with the PC300 or EM400. This manual refers to the PC300 and EM400 as radio devices. If there is a difference in the functionality of the radio devices PC300 and EM400, information will be listed separately. 1.1 Related Documentation This manual is supplied with an Integrators Manual when you purchase a PC300 or EM400. Overview AT commands, issued from a computer in your application are used to control and implement the functions of the module. Using AT commands, the following actions are possible: Control of DCE GPRS Call control Supplementary Service SIM application tool kit Control any embedded application in the device The manual contains a large number of Sony Ericsson-specific commands in addition to those implemented in accordance with the 3GPP and ITU-T recommendations. These commands are provided to enhance the functions of the module. The Sony Ericsson-specific commands are identified by the asterisk that precedes the command (see the syntax description provided below). Only commands that are listed in the AT Commands Manual are supported unless otherwise stated. Other commands may be supported by the module but these are only included for historical or legacy reasons. History of Core Module AT Commands Manuals The following table describes the module software version documented in each AT Command Manual version.
AT Manual Version PA1 PA3 Product Firmware Revision R1A025 R1A039

1.2

1.3

1.4

Syntax Description This section provides a brief description of the syntax used for the PC300 AT command set. See the ITU-T recommendation V.25ter for additional information.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 9 of 272

1.4.1

Conventions In this manual, the following conventions are used to explain the AT commands. <command> The name of the command that is to be entered. <parameter> The parameter values that are defined for a certain command. <CR> The command line is terminated by the Carriage Return (or Enter key) or ATS3 command. <LF> Line feed character or ATS4 command. < > The term enclosed in angle brackets is a syntactical element. The brackets do not appear in the command line. [] Square brackets are used to indicate that a certain item is optional. For example, sub-parameters of a command or an optional part of a response. The brackets do not appear in the command line. <Value> The default values of the supported parameters are indicated by using bold text when presenting the value. Other characters, including ?', parenthesis, etc., appear in commands and responses as written. The final result codes OK, ERROR, +CME ERROR: <err> and CMS ERROR:<err> (see sections 1.3.3 AT Response Syntax and 1.4 Error Codes) are not listed under Possible Responses for each AT command. OK and ERROR are listed if these are the only possible responses.

1.4.2

AT Command Syntax The AT standard is a line-oriented command language. Each command is made up of the following three elements: the prefix; the body; the termination character. The prefix consists of the letters AT or "at", or , to repeat the execution of the previous command line, the characters "A/" or "a/". The body is made up of the command, the parameter, and if applicable the associated values. Commands may be combined in the same command line. Spaces between the individual bodies are ignored.

Basic Syntax Command

The format of basic syntax commands is as follows: AT<command>[=][<parameter>]<CR> ATS0=0<CR> (sets the automatic answering) Additional commands may follow a command on the same command line without any character being required for separation. For the command D parameters, see the description for the command in question. A version of the basic syntax is: PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 10 of 272

AT<command><parameter>
Extended Syntax Command

AT+<command>= [<parameter>] AT*<command>=[<parameter>] AT+CFUN=0<CR> (powers down the module) If several values are included in the command, they are separated by commas. It is also possible to enter commands with no values. Additional commands may follow an extended syntax command on the same command line if a semicolon (; IRA 3B) is inserted after the preceding extended command as a separator.
Read Command Syntax

The read command is used to check the current values of parameters. Type ?, after the command line: AT+<command>? AT*<command>? AT<command>? AT+CSCS?<CR> (show current character set) <CR>IRA<CR> (information text response) <CR>OK<CR>(final result code response) Test Command Syntax The test command is used to test whether the command has been implemented or to give information about the type of subparameters it contains. Type ?, after the command line: AT+<command>=? AT*<command>=? AT+CPAS=?<CR> (shows supported values for the response parameters) <CR>CPAS: (0, 3, 4, 129, 130, 131)<CR> (supported values) <CR>OK<CR> (final result code) If the indicated <parameter> is not recognized, the result code ERROR is issued. Possible responses are indicated both as <command>:(list of supported<parameter>) and (in most cases) the actual range of the parameter values. 1.4.3 Other Terminology In this document, terms alternating mode and alternating call refer to all GSM bearer and teleservices that incorporate more than one basic service (voice, data, fax) within one call. 1.4.4 AT Response Syntax The default mode response shown below is in text mode. For information about the ATV DCE response, see ATV DCE Response Format. Possible formats for the result codes are: Basic format result code, such as OK. The Basic result code also has a numerical equivalent. PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 11 of 272

Extended format result code, prefixed with a plus sign (+) or an asterisk (*): AT+<command>: <parameter > AT*<command>: <parameter> where the <parameter> is the result code value, note that a single space character separates the colon character from the <parameter>. If several values are included in the result code, they are separated by commas. It is also possible that a result code has no value. The extended syntax result codes have no numerical equivalent. They are always issued in alphabetical form. Information text response may contain multiple lines separated by <CR>. The TE detects the end of informational text responses by looking for a final result code response, such as OK. There are two types of result code responses as outlined below: Final Result Code A final result code indicates to the TE that execution of the command is completed and another command may be issued. If you type an implemented AT command, you should get the result code OK. If you type an AT command that is not implemented, or which had the wrong parameter or syntax, you will get an error result code. It is ERROR or, for example, +<command> ERROR followed by an error code. Final result codes are: Value General meaning OK Command executed, no errors ERROR Invalid command or command line too long NO DIALTONE No dialing possible, wrong mode BUSY Remote station busy NO ANSWER Connection completion time-out NO CARRIER Link not established or disconnected
Unsolicited Result Code

Unsolicited result codes indicate the occurrence of an event not directly associated with a command being issued from the TE. 1.5 Examples on How to Use the AT Commands For many of the more complicated commands, examples are provided after the commands description. Always refer to the detailed description of the command in question to check valid parameter values, AT command syntax and Response syntax. GPRS Communication To initiate a session with the network you need to set up a data account on the module using the AT+CGDCONT command. You need to specify the correct Access Point Name (APN) which you get from your service provider. The command below sets up the data account to access an APN called "internet."

1.6

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 12 of 272

AT+CGDCONT=1,IP,internet After this you need to use the ATD command to make a GPRS call. The example below dials into the network using account number 1. ATD*99***1# If the module is able to connect to the APN it will return a CONNECT. At this point PPP/IP packets should be sent by the application, to negotiate an IP address. The easiest way of doing this whole thing is to create a windows dial up networking session with the dial string *99***1# after creating the data account on the module. It is not possible to initiate a GPRS session from the network at present. The reason for this is that unless a PDP context has been setup it has not been assigned an IP address by the GGSN/DHCP server and as a result it cannot be addressed other than through its ME number (defeating the object of using IP). This is specified in GSM 7.60 or 3GPP 27.060. For additional information about GPRS communication, refer to the application note, which can be obtained from the extranet or from customer support. 1.7 Abortability Commands that are able to be stopped or terminated while executing are said to be "abortable". These abortable commands may be terminated by sending a character or control sequence. As very few commands are abortable - all AT-Commands in this manual should be considered "not abortable" unless otherwise noted. This command is abortable.

The following commands can be aborted: AT&W Store Configuration Profile AT*E2CMGL List Message without marking Read AT+CCFC Call Forwarding number and Conditions AT+CCWA Call Waiting AT+CGACT PCP Context Activate AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach AT+CLAC List AT Commands AT+CLCK Facility Lock AT+CLIP Calling Line Identification AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction AT+CMGC Send Command AT+CMGS Send Message AT+CMGW Write Message to Memory AT+CMSS Send Storage AT+CNUM Subscriber Number AT+COLP Connected Line Presentation AT+COPN Read Operator Names AT+CPOL Preferred Operator List PC300 AT Command Manual Page 13 of 272 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

ATA ATD

Answer Incoming Call Dial

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 14 of 272

Call Control
2.1 ATA Answer Incoming Call

Description Answer an incoming call

Command ATA

Possible Responses CONNECT CONNECT <text> NO CARRIER ERROR OK

Description: The command instructs the MS to answer immediately if an incoming call is pending. The behaviour is different depending on the type of incoming call as reflected in the table below. Note 1: If a test command (ATA=?) is issued, the response will be NO CARRIER as this will be interpreted as ATA command. This command is abortable. Defined values:
<text> 4800 9600 19200 28800 xx Example: Description Connected with data bit rate of 4800 bits/s Connected with data bit rate of 9600 bits/s Connected with data bit rate of 19200 bits/s Connected with data bit rate of 28800 bits/s (other values may appear due to functionality)

RING RING ATA OK 2.2 ATD Dial Command syntax: The dial command includes a number of dial modifiers and parameters that influence both the behaviour and the result codes. As a consequence of that the description table includes a number of typical Page 15 of 272

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

combinations for better understanding compared to writing the command with all parameters and dial modifiers presented as one line as in most other commands.
Description Originate a call and dial the phone number specified in <dial_string>. Command ATD<dial_string>[G or g][I or i][;] Possible

Responses CONNECT CONNECT <text> NO NO

CARRIER DIALTONE BUSY

No action commands immediately.

that returns result codes

ATD[;]

semicolon included) NO

OK (If

CARRIER (If semicolon not Dial the phone number stored in memory location <mem> with omitted, the memory +CPBS command. ATD>[<mem>]<n>[G or g][I or i][;] included) CONNECT CONNECT <text> NO

index <n>. If <mem> is storage is defined by the

CARRIER NO DIAL TONE BUSY ATD><str>[G or g][I or i][;]

Dial the phone number that corresponds with alphanumeric field in <str>

CONNECT CONNECT <text> NO

CARRIER NO DIAL TONE BUSY

Redial the latest phone number dialled. Note that in case of

ATDL[G or g][I or i][;]

CONNECT <text> NO CARRIER NO DIAL

CONNECT

multiplexer, e.g. 27.010 this command will send the latest dialled number

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 16 of 272

Description on the same channel as the ATDL command. This in contrast to the ATD>LD command,

Command

Possible Responses TONE BUSY

which will send the latest dialled number in total.

Description: This command instructs the MS to originate a call, which may be data or voice. The phone number used to establish the connection will consist of digits and modifiers included in <dial_string> or a stored number specified by the <mem>, <n> or <str> parameters, or dial modifier L. This allows for dialling from phonebook locations based on index or an alphanumeric field that identifies an entry in phonebook as well as from other <mem> storages such as Last Dialled Numbers (LD). Command Select Phonebook Memory Storage (+CPBS) is recommended to be used to select memory storage. Note! Only ME and SM memory storage are supported by ATD. If the dial string is followed by a semicolon this informs the phone that the number is a voice call rather than a data number. Dial command terminated by semicolon shall always give OK as terminating result code. Note: Other commands added in the same string after the ATD command are ignored. Aborting an ATD command is accomplished by the transmission from the DTE to the DCE of any character. A single character shall be sufficient to abort the command in progress; however, characters transmitted during the first 125 milliseconds after transmission of the termination character are ignored. This is to allow the DTE to append additional control characters such as line feed after the command line termination character.
Defined values: <dial_string> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 D 8 9 * # + A B C Description Valid characters for origination This character is a part of V.25ter, but is here is transmitted for this character. W ' T P The W modifier is ignored but is included for compatibility reasons. The comma modifier is ignored but is included

only included for compatibility reasons, no code

for compatibility reasons. compatibility reasons.

The T modifier is ignored but is included for The P modifier is ignored but is included for

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 17 of 272

<dial_string> ! @

Description compatibility reasons. The ! modifier is ignored but is included for compatibility reasons. The @ modifier is ignored but is included for compatibility reasons.

<text> 9600 4800

Description Connected with data bit rate of 9600 bits/s Connected with data bit rate of 4800 bits/s

Final Result Codes For the use of final result codes NO DIALTONE and BUSY see the X command.
Alphabetic (ATV1) CONNECT CONNECT <text> Numeric (ATV0) 1 Description If connection is successfully established, and X0 is selected If connection is successfully established and Xn is selected where "n" is any value parameter is explained below NO CARRIER ERROR NO DIALTONE BUSY OK 7 0 3

other than 0. The meaning of the <text> Unable to establish a connection or the user 4 6 An unexpected error occurred while trying to establish the connection The ME is being used for a voice call or is not within coverage of the network The ME number called is engaged, valid for data and voice connections Only valid for voice connections

connection attempt was aborted by the

<str> String type

Description String type value, which should be equal to an memories. alphanumeric field in a phonebook entry in the searched Note: The character specifying which number in the

contact entry that should be used must be included in the

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 18 of 272

<str>

Description string; e.g. "/H" for home number, "/M" for mobile number and so on.

<n> Integer type

Description Memory location in the selected memory. This value should be in the range of locations available in the memory used.

<mem> ME SM LD

Description ME memory SIM memory Last Dialled memory. This is available, and may be used for dialling, but is not updated by the platform. This must be handled by an application.

Example:

ATD07747008670; OK 2.3 ATD Extension (*99) - Request Packet Domain Service

Description Make a

Syntax D*<GPRS/Packet

Possible

responses CONNECT NO CARRIER

GPRS/Packet Domain call. Read the current setting Test

Domain_SC>[*[<called_address>] [*[<L2P>][*[<cid>]]]]# Not applicable

command to show if the supported command is

Not applicable

Description: The V.25ter 'D' (Dial) command causes the ME to enter the V.25ter online data state and, with the TE, to start the specified layer 2 protocol. The ME will return CONNECT to confirm acceptance of the command prior to entering the V.25ter online data state. No PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 19 of 272

further commands may follow on the AT command line. When layer 2 protocol has terminated, either as a result of an orderly shut down of the PDP or an error, the ME shall enter V.25ter command state and return the NO CARRIER final result code. <L2P> and <cid> are the same as in the +CGDATA command. The +CGDCONT, +CGQREQ, etc. commands may be used in the modem initialisation AT command string to set values for for PDP type, APN, QoS etc. NOTE: The dial string conforms to the syntax specified in 3GPP TS 22.030 Defined Values:
<GPRS/Packet_Domain SC> Integer type Description (GPRS/Packet Domain Service Code) a digit string (value 99) which identifies a request to use the GPRS/Packet Domain

<called_address> String type

Description Value received in this parameter is ignored by the platform.

<L2P> 1

Description PPP

<cid> Integer type

Description See +CGDCONT for definition of <cid>

2.4

ATD Extension (*98) - Request Packet Domain IP Service

Description Make a

Syntax D*<GPRS/Packet

Possible

responses CONNECT NO CARRIER

GPRS/Packet Domain call. setting Test command to show if the Read the current

Domain_SC_IP>[*<cid>]# Not applicable Not applicable

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 20 of 272

Description command is supported

Syntax

Possible responses

Description: This command causes the ME to perform whatever actions are necessary to establish communication between the TE and the external Packet Data Network. The V.25ter 'D' (Dial) command causes the ME to enter the V.25ter online data state and, with the TE, to start the specified layer 2 protocol. The ME shall return CONNECT to confirm acceptance of the command prior to entering the V.25ter online data state. No further commands may follow on the AT command line. The detailed behaviour after the online data state has been entered is dependent on the PDP type. It is described briefly in clause 9 (for IP) of 3GPP TS 27.060. PS attachment and PDP context activation procedures may take place prior to or during the PDP startup if they have not already been performed using the +CGATT and +CGACT commands. When the layer 2 protocol has terminated, either as a result of an orderly shut down of the PDP or an error, the ME enters V.25ter command state and return the NO CARRIER final result code. The usage of <cid> is the same as in the +CGDATA command. The +CGDCONT, +CGQREQ, etc. commands may then be used in the modem initialisation AT command string to set values for for PDP type, APN, QoS etc.. If <cid> is omitted, the ME shall attempt to activate the context using: (a) any information provided by the TE during the PDP startup procedure, e.g. the TE may provide a PDP type and/or PDP address to the ME, (b) a priori knowledge, e.g. the ME may implement only one PDP type (c) using the 'Empty PDP type' (3GPP TS 24.008). (No PDP address or APN shall be sent in this case and only one PDP context subscription record shall be present in the HLR for this subscriber.) This command may be used in both normal and modem compatibility modes. NOTE: The dial string conforms to the syntax specified in 3GPP TS 22.030 Defined Values:
<GPRS/Packet_Domain SC_IP> Integer type Description (GPRS/Packet Domain Service Code) a

digit string (value 98) which identifies a with IP (PDP types IP & PPP)

request to use the GPRS/Packet Domain

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 21 of 272

<cid> Integer type

Description See +CGDCONT for definition of <cid>

2.5

ATH

Hang up

Description Terminate the call Test command to show if the command is supported

Command ATH[<n>] ATH=?

Possible

Responses H: (0)

Description: This command signals the MS to terminate an active call. Defined Values:
<n> 0 Description Terminate a connection, only <n> = 0 supported.

2.6

ATO

Return to Online Data Mode

Description Return to on-line data mode

Command ATO[<value>]

Possible Responses CONNECT CONNECT <text> NO CARRIER ERROR

Test command to show if the command is supported

ATO=?

O: [0]

Description: Switch to the on-line data mode from the on-line command mode during an active call. Returns ERROR when not in on-line command mode.
Defined values: <value> 0 Description Return to on-line data state from on-line command

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 22 of 272

2.7

ATP

Select Pulse dialing

Description Select pulse dialing Test if the command is supported

Command ATP ATP=?

Possible Responses OK OK

Description: Command is ignored, and is implemented for compatibility only. It would normally cause the next D command to use pulses when dialing the number. 2.8 ATT Select Tone Dialing

Description Select tone dialing Test if the command is supported

Command ATT ATT=?

Possible Responses OK OK

Description: This command is ignored. It is implemented for compatibility only. It would normally cause the next D command to use tones when dialing the number. 2.9 ATX Call Progress Monitoring Control

Description Set call progress monitoring control Show the current setting Test if the command is supported

Command ATX[=][<n>] ATX? ATX=?

Possible Responses OK ERROR X: <n> X: (list of supported <n>s)

Description: This command is used to indicate whether dial-tone detection and busy-tone detection are used during a call set-up. You can also use this command to display the current dial-tone and busy-tone detection settings.
Defined values: <n> 0 Description No BUSY or NO DIALTONE result codes given. No line speed

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 23 of 272

<n> 1 2

Description reported together with CONNECT result code. Busy and dial tone detection off. Report line-speed on connection No BUSY result code is given. NO DIALTONE result code CONNECT result code. returned if no network. Reports line speed together with BUSY result code given if called line is busy. No NO DIALTONE

result code is given. Reports line speed together with CONNECT result code. BUSY result code is given if called line is busy. NO DIALTONE is

given if no network. Report line speed together with CONNECT result code. Default value.

Note: If there is no network available the <n> parameter will decide if NO DIALTONE or NO CARRIER will be returned. If the call recipient is busy, the <n> parameter will decide if BUSY or NO CARRIER will be returned. 2.10 AT+CHUP Hang up Call

Description Request hang-up

Command AT+CHUP

Possible Responses OK ERROR

Description: This command causes the TA to hang up the current CS call of the MT. If no call is present, but an incoming call is notified, then the incoming call is rejected. The purpose of this command is not to replace the V.25ter command "H", but to give an assured procedure to terminate an alternating mode call. 2.11 AT+CLCC List Current Calls

Description Get list of current calls from the MS

Syntax AT+CLCC

Possible Responses [+CLCC: <id1>,<dir>,<s tat>,<mode>,< mpty>[,<numbe

r>,<type>[,<alp ha>[,<priority>]

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 24 of 272

Description

Syntax

Possible Responses ]] [<CR><LF> +CLCC: <id2>,<dir>,<s tat>,<mode>,< mpty>[,<numbe

r>,<type>[,<alp ha>[,<priority>] ]] Test if the command is supported AT+CLCC =? [...]]] OK

Description: This command returns the list of current calls of MT. If command succeeds but no calls are available, no information response is sent to TE.
Defined values: <idx> integer Description 22.030. Call identification number as described in 3GPP TS

<dir> 0 1

Description Mobile originated (MO) call Mobile terminated (MT) call

<stat> 0 1 2 3 4 5

Description Active Held Dialing (MO call) Alerting (MO call) Incoming (MT call) Waiting (MT call)

<mode> 0 1

Description Voice Data

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 25 of 272

<mode> 9

Description Unknown

<mpty> 0 1

Description Call is not one of multiparty (conference) call parties Call is one of multiparty (conference) call parties

<number> String

Description Phone number in format specified by <type>

<type> Integer type 128 129 145 161 128...155

Description Type of address octet, refer 3GPP 24.008 Unknown numbering plan, national / international number unknown ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number Other values refer to 3GPP 24.008

<alpha> String

Description Alphanumeric representation of <number> corresponding to the entry found in phonebook; used Select TE Character Set AT+CSCS character set should be the one selected with command

<priority> Integer type 0-4

Description optional digit type parameter indicating the eMLPP 22.067 priority level of the call, values specified in 3GPP TS Valid values

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 26 of 272

Control and Status


3.1 ATS0 Automatic Answer Control

Description Automatic answer control setting Test if the command is supported Read the current

Command ATS0=[<rcnt>] ATS0? ATS0=?

Possible Responses OK ERROR <rcnt> S0: (list of supported <rcnt>s)

Description: This command sets the number of call indications (rings) before automatically answering the call; value equaling zero disables automatic answering and is the default setting.
Defined values: <rcnt> 0 1-7 Description Disable automatic answer. Default value Answer after the specified number of rings

When <rcnt> is displayed using ATS0?, leading zeroes are added to make the result 3 digits. 3.2 ATS2 Escape Sequence Character

Description Set escape sequence character setting Show the current Test if the command is supported

Command ATS2=[<esc>] ATS2? ATS2=?

Possible Responses OK ERROR <esc> S2: (list of supported

<esc>s)

Description: Defines the character to be used as the escape sequence character when switching from on-line data mode to on-line command mode. The response to the command is modified to reflect the change. Defined values: PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 27 of 272

<esc> 128 0 to 127 128-255

Description Default value. Escape function disabled by default. Escape sequence character Escape function not enabled

Note: If the <esc> parameter is set to a value in the range of 128255, the escape sequence detection is disabled. 3.3 ATS3 Command Line Termination Character

Description Set Command Line Termination Character Show the current setting Test if the command is supported

Command ATS3=[<value>] ATS3? ATS3=?

Possible Responses OK ERROR <value> S3: (list of supported <value>s)

Description: This S-Register parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character recognized by the DCE from the DTE to terminate an incoming command line. It is also generated by the DCE as part of the header, trailer, and terminator for result codes and information text, along with the S4 parameter. The previous value of S3 is used to determine the command line termination character for entry of the command line containing the S3 setting command. However, the result code issued uses the value of S3 as set during the processing of the command line. For example, if S3 was previously set to 13 and the command line ATS3=30 is issued, the command line is terminated with a <CR> character (IA5 0/13), but the result code issued uses the character with the ordinal value 30 (IA5 2/14) in place of the <CR>.
Defined values: <value> 013 0 to 127 Description value Command line termination character <CR>, Default

Command line termination character

3.4

ATS4

Response Formatting Character

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 28 of 272

Description Set Response Formatting Character Show the current setting Test if the command is supported

Command ATS4=[<value>] ATS4? ATS4=?

Possible Responses OK ERROR <value> S4: (list of supported <value>s)

Description: This S-Register parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character generated by the DCE as part of the header, trailer, and terminator for result codes and information text, along with the S3 parameter (see the description of the V command for usage). If the value of S4 is changed in a command line, the result code issued in response to that command line will use the new value of S4.
Defined values: <value> 010 0 to 127 Description Formatting character <LF>. Default value Formatting character

3.5

ATS5

Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE)

Description Request Command Line Editing Character Show the current setting Test if the command is supported

Command ATS5=[<value>] ATS5? ATS5=?

Possible Responses OK ERROR <value> S5: (list of supported <value>s)

Description: This S-Register parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character that indicates, when recognized by the DCE , a request to delete from the command line the immediately preceding character.
Defined values: <value> 008 Description Line editing character, <BS>. Default value

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 29 of 272

<value> 0 to 127

Description Line editing character

3.6

ATS6

Blind Dial Delay Control

Description Blind dial delay control Show the current setting Test if the command is supported

Command ATS6=[<dly>] ATS6? ATS6=?

Possible Responses OK <dly> S6: (list of supported <dly>s)

Description: This command is included for compatibility. No functionality


<dly> 2 2-10 Description Wait two seconds before blind dialing. Default value Number of seconds to wait before blind dialing

3.7

ATS7

Connection Completion Timeout

Description Set connection completion timeout Show the current setting Test if the command is supported

Command ATS7=[<tmo>] ATS7? ATS7=?

Possible Responses OK ERROR <tmo> S7: (list of

supported <tmo>s)

Description: Defines the maximum time allowed between completion of dialing and the connection being established. If this time is exceeded then the connection is aborted.
Defined values: <tmo> 50 1-255 Description Timeout value in seconds. Default value Timeout value in seconds

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 30 of 272

3.8

ATS8 Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control

Description Set Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control Show the current setting Test if the command is supported

Command ATS8=[<dly>] ATS8? ATS8=?

Possible Responses OK ERROR <dly> S8: (list of supported <dly>s)

Description: This command sets the number of seconds to wait when a comma dial modifier is encountered in the dial string of the D command. The default is 2 seconds. This command is included for compatibility only. No functionality
<dly> 2 210 Description value The value of the dial modifier delay in seconds. Default

The value of the dial modifier delay in seconds

3.9

ATS10

Automatic Disconnect Delay Control

Description Set Automatic Control setting Disconnect Delay Show the current Test if the command is supported

Command ATS10=[<val>]

Possible Responses OK ERROR

ATS10? ATS10=?

<val> S10: (list of supported <val>s)

Description: This command sets the number of tenths of seconds to wait before disconnecting after TA has indicated the absence of received line signal. This command is included for compatibility. No functionality.
<val> 2 1-254 Description Default value Remains connected for two tenths of a second.

Number of tenths of a second of delay

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 31 of 272

3.10

AT+CEER

Extended Error Report

Description Request an Extended Error Report

Command AT+CEER

Possible Responses <report> OK ERROR +CEER:

Test if the command is supported

AT+CEER= ?

OK ERROR

Description: This command causes the TA to return one or more lines of information text, <report> , which offers the user of the TA an extended report for the following events: Failure in the last unsuccessful call setup (originating or answering) or in-call modification Last call release Last unsuccessful GPRS attach or unsuccessful PDP context activation Last GPRS detach or PDP context deactivation Typically, the text will consist of a single line containing the failure information given by the network in text format.
Defined values: <report> Unquoted character string Description The total number of characters, including line terminators, in the information text shall not exceed 2041 characters.

OK<CR>

Text shall not contain the sequence 0<CR> or

3.11

AT+CIND

Indicator Control

Description Set Indicator Control current setting Show the

Command AT+CIND=[<ind> [,<ind>[,]]] AT+CIND?

Possible Responses ERROR +CIND: <ind>,<ind>, +CME ERROR: <err> OK

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 32 of 272

Description Test if the command is supported

Command AT+CIND=?

Possible Responses ERROR +CIND: (<descr>,(list of supported <ind>s)), (<descr>,(list of supported <ind>s)), +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Description: This command shows the values of ME indicators. <ind> value 0 means that the indicator is off (or in a state which can be identified as off state), 1 means that indicator is on (or in a state which is more substantial than off state), 2 is more substantial than 1, and so on. If the indicator is a simple on/off style element, it has values 0 and 1. The list of <ind>s is returned as an ordered list of values without identifiers - the position of each <ind> in the list must be determined by using the test command. The ME does not allow setting of indicators, ERROR is returned from the set command. Test command returns pairs, where string value <descr> is a maximum 16 character description of the indicator and compound value is the allowed values for the indicator. If ME is not currently reachable, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned (refer to 3GPP 27.007). Notes: The indicator <descr>="signal" represents the relative signal level (e.g. number of "bars") for both GSM and WCDMA signals. This is the preferred method for obtaining signal level for both technology types. Note that +CSQ is available to obtain GSM signal levels only and an indicator mapping algorithm must be applied to the raw RSSI values returned by +CSQ, whereas +CIND may be used to obtain levels for both technology types. There is no method available for the TE to obtain the raw WCDMA signal values from the ME. The range of values reported in "signal" may vary by implementation. The default range is (0-5), however the test command should be used to determine the currently reported range. The maximum possible range of "signal" is (0-9). Indicators which apply only to phones and not to Data Card devices may appear in the test command results. Indicators listed below as (not applicable) may have reported values but are meaningless for a Data Card device.
Defined values:

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 33 of 272

<descr> "battchg" signal

Description Battery charge level (0-5) applicable) Signal quality Default range: (0-5) Maximum range: (0-9) (not

order number 1 2

"batterywarning" "chargerconnected" service sounder message call roam sms full

Battery warning (0-1) applicable) applicable) Charger connected (0-1)

(not (not

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Network service availability (0-1) applicable) Sounder activity (0-1) (not

Message received (0-1) Call in progress (0-1) Roaming indicator (0-1) (0=Home, 1=Roaming) A short message memory storage in the MT has become full (1), or memory locations are available (0); i.e. the range is (0-1). Applies to SIM and ME memory.

"callsetup"

status indicator.

Bluetooth proprietary call set up

11

Possible values are as follows:

Not currently in call set up (0),

incoming call process ongoing (1), remote party being alerted in an (0-3) "callheld"

outgoing call set up is ongoing (2), outgoing call (3); i.e the range is (not applicable) status indicator. Bluetooth propritary call hold 12

Possible values are as follows: call is currently on hold. (not applicable)

No calls currently on hold (0), a

Note: order number in the above table is used only in +CIEV unsolicited response PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 34 of 272

<ind> Integer type

Description Value shall be in range of corresponding <descr>

Example: AT+CIND=? +CIND: ("battchg",(0-5)),("signal",(0-5)),("batterywarning",(01)),("chargerconnected",(0-1)),("service",(0-1)),("sounder",(01)),("message",(0-1)),("call",(0-1)),("roam",(0-1)),("smsfull",(01)),("callsetup",(0-3)),("callheld",(0-1)) OK AT+CIND? +CIND: 5,5,0,0,1,0,1,0,1,1,0,0 OK 3.12 AT* List all Supported AT Commands

Description List all implemented AT commands

Command AT*

Possible Responses <AT Command1> [<CR><LF> <AT Command2> [ [<CR><LF><ATCommandN>]]] OK +CME ERROR: <err>

Description: Lists all the commands supported by the MS. 3.13 AT+CLAC List All Available AT Commands

Description List available AT Commands

Command AT+CLAC

Possible Responses <AT Command1> [<CR><LF> <AT Command2> [ [<CR><LF><ATCommandN>]]] OK +CME ERROR: <err>

Description: This command returns the AT commands that are available to the user.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 35 of 272

3.14

AT+CMEE

Mobile Equipment Error

Description Request Mobile Equipment Error Show the current setting

Command AT+CMEE=[<n>] AT+CMEE?

Possible Responses OK ERROR +CMEE: <n> OK ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CMEE=?

+CMEE: (list of supported <n>s) OK ERROR

Description: Disables or enables the use of result code +CME ERROR: <err> as an indication of an error relating to the functionality of the ME. When enabled, ME related errors cause +CME ERROR: <err> final result code instead of the regular ERROR final result code. ERROR is returned normally when error is related to syntax, invalid parameters, or TA functionality. For more information, refer to +CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code). Defined values:
<n> 0 1 2 Description instead. Default value values. values. Disable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use ERROR Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use numeric <err> Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use verbose <err>

3.15

+CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code) Description: This final result code is similar to the regular ERROR result code. If +CME ERROR: <err> is the result code for any of the commands in a command line, none of the commands in the same command line will be executed (neither ERROR nor OK result code shall be returned as a result of a completed command line execution). The format of <err> can be either numerical or alphabetical, and is set with the +CMEE command. The V.25ter command V does not affect the format of this result code. The following table provides the numerical values for the parameter <err>. Page 36 of 272

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

<err> 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 30 31 32 40 41 42 43 44 45 46

Description (General Errors) Module failure No connection to phone Operation not allowed Operation not supported PH-SIM PIN required PH-FSIM PIN Required PH-FSIM PUK Required SIM not inserted SIM PIN required SIM PUK required SIM failure SIM busy SIM wrong Incorrect password SIM PIN2 required SIM PUK2 required Memory or List full Invalid index within the list Item not available or list empty Memory failure Text string or parameter too long Invalid characters in text string Dial string too long Invalid characters in dial string No network service Network time-out Network not allowed - emergency calls only Network personalization PIN required Network personalization PUK required Network subset personalization PIN required Network subset personalization PUK required Service provider personalization PIN required Service provider personalization PUK required Corporate personalization PIN required

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 37 of 272

<err> 47 51 99 100 103 106 107 111 112 113 132 133 134 148 149 150 151256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 -

Description (General Errors) Corporate personalization PUK required Reserved Unknown Illegal MS Illegal ME GPRS Service not allowed PLMN not allowed Location area not allowed Roaming not allowed in this location area Service option not supported Requested service option not subscribed Service option temporarily out of order Unspecified GPRS error PDP authentication failure Invalid Mobile class Reserved Syntax Error Invalid Parameter Length ERROR SIM Authentication Failure SIM File Error (either wrong ID or content corrupted) File System Failure (GDFS error) Service Unavailable Phonebook Not Ready Phonebook Not Supported Command Line Too Long Parameter out of range Band not allowed Supplementary Service failure Command aborted Action already in progress WAN Disabled on Host Reserved

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 38 of 272

3.16

AT+CMER

Mobile Equipment Event Reporting

Description Set ME status activity

Command AT+CME R=[<mo de>[,<ke yp>[,<di sp>[,<in d>[,<bfr >]]]]]

Possible Responses +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Read the current setting

AT+CME R?

+CMER: <mode>,<keyp>,<disp>,<ind>,<bfr > OK ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CME R=?

+CMER: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <keyp>s),(list of supported (list of supported <bfr>s) OK ERROR <disp>s),(list of supported <ind>s),

Description: The command enables or disables the sending of unsolicited result codes from the ME to the TE in the case of key pressings, display changes, and indicator state changes. <mode> controls the processing of unsolicited result codes specified within this command. <bfr> controls the effect on buffered codes when <mode> 1, 2 or 3 is entered. Test command returns the modes supported by the TA as compound values. Defined values:
<mode> 0 Description3 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA; if TA result code buffer is full, codes can be buffered in some other place or the oldest ones can be discarded. (Default) 3

is no inband technique used to embed result codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode

Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE; There

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 39 of 272

<keyp> 0

Description No keypad event reporting

<disp> 0

Description No display event reporting

<ind> 0 1

Description No indicator event reporting <ind>,<value>. <ind> indicates the indicator order number (as specified for +CIND) and <value> is the new value of indicator. Indicator event reporting using result code +CIEV:

<bfr> 0

Description TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when <mode> 1...3 is entered

Unsolicited Result Codes: +CIEV: <ind>,<value> 3.16.1 +CIEV Indicator Event Unsolicited reports

Description: This unsolicited result code is enabled with the AT+CMER command and indicates changes in indicator levels. <ind> in the table below indicates the indicator order number (as specified for AT+CIND). The +CIEV result code has the following syntax: +CIEV: <ind>,<value> Defined values:
<ind> 2 5 7 8 9 10 <value> 0-x (x varies - see +CIND) 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 Service indicator Message Received (SMS) Call in progress indicator roam indicator SMS memory full Description Signal quality indicator

Note: See +CIND for details on <value> definitions.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 40 of 272

3.17

+CMS ERROR (Message Service Failure Result Code) Description: This final result code indicates an error related to mobile equipment or to the network. The operation is similar to the ERROR result code. None of the following commands in the same command line will be executed. Neither ERROR nor OK result code will be returned. ERROR is returned normally when an error is related to syntax or invalid parameters. Nevertheless, it always appears when a command fails. The syntax is as follows: +CMS ERROR: <err> Values for the <err> parameter are described in the following table.
<err> 0 - 127 128 - 255 300 301 302 303 304 305 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 320 321 322 330 331 332 340 500 Description GSM 04.11 Annex E-2 values GSM 03.40 subclause 9.2.3.22 values ME failure SMS service of ME reserved Operation not allowed Operation not supported Invalid PDU mode parameter Invalid text mode parameter SIM not inserted SIM PIN required PH-SIM PIN required SIM failure SIM busy SIM wrong SIM PUK required SIM PIN2 required SIM PUK2 required Memory failure Invalid memory index Memory full SMSC address unknown No network service Network time-out No +CNMA acknowledgment expected Unknown error

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 41 of 272

<err> 999

Description OK

3.18

AT+CPAS

Phone Activity Status

Description Execute ME Activity Status

Command AT+CPAS[=<mode>]

Possible Responses +CPAS: <pas> +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CPAS=?

+CPAS:

(list of supported <pas>s) <err> OK ERROR +CME ERROR

Description: This command returns the activity status <pas> of the ME. It can be used to interrogate the ME before requesting action from the ME. When the command is executed without the <mode> argument, the command returns <pas> values from 0 to 128 (for supported values see table below). When, on the other hand, the command is executed with the <mode> argument set to 1, the command may return Sony Ericsson specific <pas> values from 129 to 255 (for supported values see the table below). Test command returns values supported by the ME as a compound value: refer to 3GPP 27.007. Defined values:
<pas> 0 1 2 3 4 5 Description Ready (MT allows commands from TA/TE) Unavailable (MT does not allow commands from TA/TE) Unknown (MT is not guaranteed to respond to instructions) ringer is active) Ringing (MT is ready for commands from TA/TE, but the

Call in progress (MT is ready for commands from TA/TE, but a call is in progress) asleep (MT is unable to process commands from TA/TE because it is in a low functionality state)

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 42 of 272

<pas> 129 130 131

Description Not in call Mobile originated call in progress. This is a sub-state to call in progress call in progress Mobile terminated call in progress. This is a sub-state to

<mode> 0 1

Description Restricts the CPAS to return only standard <pas>values values, such as 129, 130 and 131 Allows the CPAS to return Sony Ericsson specific <pas>

Example: AT+CPAS=? +CPAS: (0-5,129-131) OK AT+CPAS +CPAS: 0 OK 3.19 AT+CPWD Change Password

Description Request facility lock

Command AT+CPWD=<fac>, <oldpwd>, <newpwd> AT+CPWD=?

Possible Responses +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR (<fac1>,<pwdlength1>), (<fac2>,<pwdlength2>), +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR +CPWD:

Test if the command is

supported

Description: This command sets a new password for the facility lock function defined by command Facility Lock +CLCK. Test command returns a list of pairs which present the available facilities and the maximum length of their password. Defined values:

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 43 of 272

<fac> "PS" SC AO OI AI IR OX AB AG AC "P2"

Description PH-SIM (lock PHone to SIM card) (ME asks password when other than current SIM card inserted) SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-up and when this lock command issued) BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1) BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1) BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 2) BIC-Roam (Bar Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the home country) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 2) BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing International Calls except to Home Country) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1) All Barring services (refer GSM 02.30) All outGoing barring services (refer GSM 02.30) All inComing barring services (refer GSM 02.30) SIM PIN2

<oldpwd> string type

Description <oldpwd> shall be the same as password specified for the facility from the ME user interface or with the change password command, +CPWD

<newpwd> string type

Description <newpwd> is the new password, maximum length of password can be determined with <pwdlength>

<pwdlength> Integer type

Description Maximum length of the password for the facility

<err>

See Listing of CME ERROR values

Example: AT+CPWD=SC,0000,0001 OK 3.20 AT+CR Service Reporting Control Page 44 of 272

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Description Set Service Reporting Control Read current setting

Command AT+CR=<mode> AT+CR?

Possible Responses OK ERROR +CR: <mode> OK ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CR=?

supported OK ERROR

+CR: (list of

<mode>s)

Description: This command controls whether intermediate bearer capability result code +CR: <serv> is returned from the TA to the TE. If service reporting is enabled, the intermediate result code is transmitted at the point during connect negotiation at which the TA has determined the speed and quality of service that will be used, before any error control or data compression reports are transmitted, and before the intermediate result code CONNECT is transmitted. Note: This command replaces old V.25ter command Modulation Reporting Control +MR, which is not appropriate for use in the GSM network. Possible error control (other than radio link protocol) and data compression reporting can be enabled with V.25ter commands Error Control Reporting +ER and Data Compression Reporting +DR. Defined values:
<mode> 0 1 Description Disable reporting. Default value Enable reporting

3.20.1

+CR

Service Reporting Unsolicited Response

Description: The +CR unsolicited messages are enabled and disabled by the AT+CR command. Format: +CR: <serv>
<serv> ASYNC SYNC REL ASYNC Description Asynchronous transparent Synchronous transparent Asynchronous non-transparent

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 45 of 272

<serv> REL SYNC GPRS [<L2P>]

Description Synchronous non-transparent GPRS The optional <L2P> proposes a layer 2 protocol to use between the MT and the TE. It is defined in the Enter GPRS Data Mode (+CGDATA) command.

3.21

AT+CRC Cellular Result Code

Description Set Cellular Result Code option Show the current setting

Command AT+CRC=[<mode>] AT+CRC?

Possible Responses OK ERROR +CRC: <mode> OK ERROR

Test if the

command is supported

AT+CRC=?

supported OK ERROR

+CRC: (list of

<mode>s)

Description: This command controls whether the extended format of incoming call indication or GPRS network request for PDP context activation or notification for VBS/VGCS calls is used. When enabled, an incoming call is indicated to the TE with unsolicited result code +CRING: <type> instead of the normal RING Note: Similar command may be found in TIA IS-99 and TIA IS-135. Defined values:
<mode> 0 1 Description Disables extended format. Default. Enables extended format

3.21.1

+CRING

Incoming Call Type Notification

Description: The +CRING unsolicited message replaces the normal RING message when it is enabled by the AT+CRC command. The following message format is used: +CRING: <type> Additional Information PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 46 of 272

In order to not confuse the UR code with a command response, the UR code is withheld if it occurs in the time between a command termination character is received and a final result code is sent.
<type> ASYNC SYNC REL ASYNC REL SYNC FAX VOICE GPRS Description Asynchronous transparent Synchronous transparent Asynchronous non-transparent Synchronous non-transparent Facsimile Normal voice call GPRS network request for PDP context activiation

3.22

AT+CSQ Signal Strength

Description Request Signal Strength

Command AT+CSQ

Possible Responses +CSQ: <rssi>,<ber> +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

Test if the

command is supported

AT+CSQ=?

<rssi>s),(list of supported <ber>s) OK ERROR +CME ERROR <err>

+CSQ: (list of supported

Description: Returns the received signal strength indication <rssi> and channel bit error rate <ber> from the ME. Test command returns values supported as compound values. Additional Information: For WCDMA the returned values are +CSQ: 99,99 It is recommended to use the +CIND command. Defined values:
<rssi> 0 1 2..30 Description -113dBm or less -111dBm -109 -53dBm

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 47 of 272

<rssi> 31 99

Description -51dBm or greater Not known or not detectable

<ber> 99

Description (BER = Bit Error Rate) Not known or not detectable

3.23

AT*ECAM

Call Monitoring

Description Set Call Monitoring on or off

Command AT*ECAM=<onoff>

Possible Responses <err> OK ERROR +CME ERROR:

Show the current setting

AT*ECAM?

*ECAM: <on/off> +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Test if the

command is supported

AT*ECAM=?

supported

*ECAM: list of

<on/off>s +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Description: This command activates or deactivates the call monitoring function in the ME. When this log function is activated in the ME, the ME informs about call events, such as incoming call, connected, hang up etc. It is preferable that the current status shall always be sent with result code *ECAV when activating the log function. The purpose of this is two fold: to gather relevant information for the call log in a TE; to make it possible for the TE to display call state information for an ongoing call. Defined values:

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 48 of 272

<onoff> 0 1

Description The call log function is disabled (off). Default value The call log function is enabled (on)

3.23.1

*ECAV Call Monitoring Unsolicited Result Code

Description: The *ECAV result code is issued every time there is a change in the progress of a call. The *ECAV result code has the following syntax. *ECAV: <ccid>,<ccstatus>,<calltype>[,<processid>][,exitcause][,<number>, <type>] <ccid>: This is an integer value identifying the call for which the progress has changed. Unless more than one call is in progress, this value will be 1. The maximum number of call control processes is 7 (5 multiparty members, 1 call on hold, 1 call waiting). Defined values:
<ccid> 0-7 Description Id of the call for which progress change is reported.

<ccstatus>: This is an integer value showing the status of the call.


<ccstatus> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description IDLE. CALLING. Mobile Originated (outgoing) call started. CONNECTING. Mobile Originated (outgoing) call in the process of establishing a connection. ACTIVE. Connection established between A and B. HOLD. Connection put on hold. WAITING. Mobile Terminated (incoming). Mobile Originated (outgoing) ringback (remote end ringing) detected. 7 BUSY. ALERTING. Mobile Terminated (incoming) call ringing or

<calltype>: This is an integer identifying what type of call is in progress.


<calltype> 1 2 4 Description Voice. Data FAX. Not supported

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 49 of 272

<calltype> 128

Description Voice 2.

<processid>: This is an integer identifying the process that the module returns to after returning to the IDLE state.
<processid> 08 68 69 122 Description CC. Call Control MM. Mobile Management. MS. Mobile Station. RR. Radio Resources.

<exitcause>: This is an integer value showing why the call ended. Only reported when returning to the IDLE state (<ccstatus>=0).
<exitcause> 1 3 6 8 16 17 18 19 21 22 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 34 38 41 42 43 44 Description Unassigned (unallocated) number. No route to destination. Channel unacceptable. Operator determined barring. Normal call clearing. User busy. No user responding. User alerting, no answer. Call rejected. Number changed. Pre-emption. Non selected user clearing. Destination out of order. Invalid number format (incomplete number). Facility rejected. Response to STATUS ENQUIRY. Normal, unspecified. No circuit/channel available. Network out of order. Temporary failure. Switching equipment congestion. Access information discarded. requested circuit/channel not available.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 50 of 272

<exitcause> 47 49 50 55 57 58 63 65 68 69 70 79 81 87 88 91 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 111 127 150 255

Description Resources unavailable, unspecified. Quality of service unavailable. Requested facility not subscribed. Incoming calls barred within the CUG. Bearer capability not authorized. Bearer capability not presently available. Service or option not available, unspecified. Bearer service not implemented. ACM equal to or greater than ACMmax. Requested Facility not yet implemented. Only Restricted Digital information bearer capability is available. Service or option not implemented, unspecified. Invalid Transaction Identifier value. User not member of CUG. Incompatible Destination. Invalid transit network selection. Semantically incorrect message. Invalid mandatory information. Message type non-existent or not implemented. Message type not compatible with protocol state. Information element non-existent or not implemented Conditional IE Error Message not compatible with protocol state Recovery on timer expiry Protocol error, unspecified Inter-working unspecified Radio Path Not Available Empty

<number>: A string containing the phone number of the party calling the module (Mobile Terminated) or the party called from the module (Mobile Originated). The <number> is only shown for state CALLING (1) and ALERTING (6) for MT calls.
<number> String Description String of valid dial characters (0-9, +, #, *, A, B,

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 51 of 272

<number>

Description and C)

<type>: This is an integer identifying the type of number displayed in <number>.


<type> Integer Description subclause 10.5.4.7). ; default 145 when dialing string includes international access code character +, otherwise 129. Type of address octet in integer format (refer GSM 04.08

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 52 of 272

Operational Control and Status


4.1 AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality

Description Set MS functionality

Command AT+CFUN=<fun>

Possible Responses <err> OK +CME ERROR:

Show the current setting

AT+CFUN?

+CFUN: <fun> +CME ERROR: <err>

Test if the command is supported

AT+CFUN=?

+CFUN: (list of supported <fun>s) +CME ERROR: <err>

Description: This command selects the level of functionality <fun> in the MS. Level full functionality results in the highest level of power drawn. Minimum functionality results in the minimum power drawn. This command may also be used to restrict the supported Radio Access Technology (RAT) of the ME between GSM only or WCDMA only. Test command returns values supported by the ME. Notes: Switching to Power Down mode <fun>=0, results in a complete power down of the ME, and it is then no longer responsive to further AT commands. The ME must be reset by removing and reinserting the device in order to reestablish control. For this reason, <fun>=0 should never be used with an internal minicard ME unless the host system is shutting down and power to the card slot is guaranteed to be cycled. In order to set the ME to minimal functionality and still retain the ability for further software control, <fun>=4 should be used. For PCI Express mini card products, note that the W_Disable_N input signal will also have an effect on the CFUN state, and the allowed CFUN values. When this signal prevents turning on the radio with <fun>=1, 5, or 6, a specific CME ERROR (WAN Disabled on Host) will be returned to indicate this failure cause.
Defined values: <fun> 0 Description Power down.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 53 of 272

<fun> 1 2 3 4

Description Full functionality Not supported Not supported is often referred to as "flight mode." Default value GSM only (WCDMA radio is off) WCDMA only (GSM radio is off) Disable transmit and receive RF circuits. SIM still enabled. This

5 6

4.2

AT*E2RESET

Restart Module

Description Perform a restart of the device firmware Test if the command is supported

Command AT*E2RESET AT*E2RESET=?

Possible OK ERROR OK ERROR

Responses

Description: This command is used to cause the module to reset and restart. The software internally will allow a watch dog timeout to occur which will reset the microcontrollers internal registers and restart the software at the beginning of operation. Most blocks internal to the module will be reset and reinitialized. All settings and levels set by previous AT commands that are not stored in non-volatile memory will have to be reissued. The general result of this command is to return as much of the system back to normal power on conditions. The power state will be returned to CFUN=4 after the reset. This command is available without SIM access. Note: The proper radio access operations as defined by 3GPP will be performed prior to the reset. e.g. if the device is GPRS attached and registered then a detach and power-down registration will be performed. 4.3 AT+CMAR Master Reset

Description Perform a master reset in the MS

Command AT+CMAR=<ME_lock_code>

Possible +CME

Responses ERROR: <err>

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 54 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Responses OK ERROR

Test if the

command is supported

AT+CMAR=?

ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

+CME

Description: This command requests the MS to reset user data. The user data in the MS will be reset to the default values. This command also unlocks the MS.
<ME_lock_code> String Description before performing the master reset, see also AT+CLCK Security code (ME_lock_code) must be verified

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 55 of 272

Profiles
5.1 AT&F Set to Factory Defined Configuration Profile

Description Execute Test if the command is supported

Command AT&F[=][<profile>] AT&F=?

Possible Responses OK ERROR &F: (list of supported factory profiles)

Description: This command instructs the DCE to set all parameters in the current profile to default values specified by the manufacturer, which may take in consideration hardware configuration and other manufacturer defined criteria. This command modifies parameters in volatile memory. In order to commit these changes to non-volatile memory, AT&W must be executed after AT&F has returned OK. If AT&W is not executed, the AT&F effect will not survive a reset. Defined values:
<profile> 0 Description Factory profile to restore (only profile 0 is supported)

Configuration Profile Settings and Default Values The commands AT&F, ATZ, and AT&W allow the user to restore, and store the current profile parameter values outlined in the table below.
Parameter Description Result Code DCE Suppression Response Format Call Progress Monitoring Control Calling Line ID Restricted AT+CLIR (0-2) AT Command ATQ ATV Range (0-1) (0-1) Factory Values Mode is off on 1 - Verbose is 0 - Quiet Defined

ATX

(0-1)

0 - Don't Show Speed 0 - Don't use Network Setting

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 56 of 272

Parameter Description Extended Error Reporting Command Echo Handshake Mode Circuit 108 Response (Data Terminal Ready) Circuit 107 Response (Data Set Ready)

AT Command AT+CMEE

Range (0-2)

Factory Values

Defined

0 - CMEE is off

ATE AT\Q AT&D

(0-1) (0-2) (0-2)

1 - Echo is on 1 - HW

handshake 0 - DTR Ignore

AT&S

(0-1)

0 - DSR On

Circuit 109 Control Detect) (Carrier DTE-DCE Control

AT&C

(0-2)

Passage

1 - DCD

Local Flow

AT+IFC

(0-3)

DCE_DTE, (0-2) DTE_DCE

2 - HW, 2 - HW

Select bearer service type

AT+CBST

(0-134) Speed, (0-3) Connection Element (0-7) Name,

7 - 9600bps, 0 - Data Ckt Async, 1 - Nontransparent 0 - Off

Calling Line

Identification Presentation Connected Line Identification Presentation Operator Selection

AT+CLIP

(0-1)

AT+COLP

(0-1)

0 - Off

AT+COPS

(0-2)

0 - Long Alphanumeric

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 57 of 272

Parameter Description Format Service Reporting Control Cellular

AT Command

Range

Factory Values 0 - Off

Defined

AT+CR

(0-1)

Result Code (extended) Network

AT+CRC

(0-1)

0 - Off

Registration Radio Link Protocol

AT+CREG AT+CRLP

(0-2) (1-61) IWS, (1-61) MS, (48-255)T1, (1-255) N2

0 - Off 61, 61, 48, 6 0 - Off

Cable

Interface

AT+ILRR

(0-1)

Local Rate Reporting Select Set Character Advice of Charge Call Meter Maximum Event AT+CCWE (0-1) AT+CSCS (0-7) 0 - PCCP437

AT+CAOC

(0-2)

0 - Query mode 0 - Off

Phonebook Storage Select

AT+CPBS

T,SM,DC,RC, MC,EN,ON (0-1)

(FD,LD,ME,M

SM - SIM

Phonebook 0 - Off, 0 - Off, 1 - Voice

Call Waiting

AT+CCWA

Capability, (0-2) Mode, (0-128) Bearer

Interface Port Command

AT+IPR

0,4800,960 400,57600,

(0,1200,240

0 - Auto

0,19200,38 115200,230 400,460800

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 58 of 272

Parameter Description Single

AT Command

Range ,921600)

Factory Values 0 - Voice

Defined

Numbering Scheme Waiting Message Indication Network Info DRX Reporting Mode SIM Detection Cell Reporting Description Operational Reporting IP Setup Parameters: Initial Timeout, Retransmit Count, Size Send Block Send Interval Wait, Lock Escape Sequence, t Escape Sequence (GPRS) OpenTimeou Temperature

AT+CSNS

0 Voice, 4 Data

AT*EMWI

(0-2)

0 - Off

AT*ERINFO AT*EDRX

(0-1) (0-1)

0 - Off 0 - Off

AT*E2SDR

(0-1)

0 - Off

AT*E2CD AT*E2OTR

(0-1) (0-1)

0 - Off 0 - Off

AT*E2IPS

(1-10), (3-8) , (1-10), (255-1460), (0,1), (0-120)

2, 8, 2, 1020, 0, 64

AT*E2ESC

(0-10)

0 - No Guard Time

Guard Time Unstructured Supplementa AT+CUSD (0-2)

0 - Off

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 59 of 272

Parameter Description ry Service Data Call Monitoring Mobile Event Equipment Reporting Supplementa ry Service Notification Expanded Indicator Control

AT Command

Range

Factory Values

Defined

AT*ECAM AT+CMER

(0-1) (0-3)

0 - Off 0 - Off/Buffer, 0 - Off

Reporting, (0-1) Capability

AT+CSSN

(0-1) MO unsol, unsol (0-1) MT

0 - Off, 0 - Off

AT*ECIND

(0-1) for each indicator

0 - Off (for all)

Pin Event Module State Check and Report in Restart DTMF sec State Change Message Duration in SMS Cell Broadcast Message Type

AT*EPEE AT*EMRDY

(0-1) (0-1)

0 - Off 0 - Off

AT*ESRB AT+VTD

(0-1) (1-1000)

1 - On 1

AT+CSCB

(0-1) Mode, N/A Msg Id, N/A, CBM DCS

0 - Accept, "" - Empty, "" - Empty 17, 167, 0, 0

Set Text Mode Parameters

AT+CSMP

(0-255) (0-255)

First Oct, Valid Pd, (0-255) Prot Id, (0-255) DCS

Show Text

AT+CSDH

(0-1)

0 - Don't

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 60 of 272

Parameter Description Mode Parameters New Message

AT Command

Range

Factory Values show

Defined

AT+CNMI

(0-1) Unsol Msg, Msg, (0-3) Cell Bcast, (0-2) Status Rept, 0 Buffered Result (0-3) Rcv

1 - Discard, 0 - None, 0 - None, 0 - None, 0 - Flush

Indication

GPRS Controls unsol output in network domain event when change GPRS: Packet AT+CGEREP (0-2) Mode, (0-1) Buffer Effect AT+CGDCO (1-20) Ctxt id, ("IP", "IPV4", "IPV6") PDP Type, N/A PDP Addr, (0-2) data comp, comp Minimum for PDP QoS profile Context Requested QoS profile for PDP AT+CGEQRE Q AT+CGEQMI N See N (0-4) hdr Empty (No Empty (No defined). 1 - Discard, 1 - Flush AT+CGREG (0-2) 0 - Disable

reporting PDP Context NT

PDPcontexts

AT+CGEQMI

QoS profiles for any PDP contexts). Empty (No QoS profiles for any PDP

See AT+CGEQRE Q

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 61 of 272

Parameter Description Context Internet Account Settings

AT Command

Range

Factory Values contexts). Empty (No internet

Defined

AT*ENAD

AT*ENAD

See

accounts for any PDP contexts).

Global

Settings Input/Output Read/Write Ring indicator for SMS (duration of steps of 50ms) SIM Selection AT*E2IO AT*ESSE AT*E2SMSRI N/A (0-1) (0-1150) 0 0 - Internal 0 (ms)

ring pulse in

Daylight

Saving Time (adjustment) Automatic Time Zone update (capability) Operator Mode Selection Operator

AT*EDST

(0-2)

0 - STD

AT+CTZU

(0-1)

AT+COPS

(0-1,3)

0 - Automatic

Selection (operator name) Mode GPRS AutoAttach Service Center Address SMS Bearer

AT+COPS

Only used is set to manual

when mode

"" (empty string)

AT+CGSMS AT*E2GAA AT+CSCA

(0-3) (0-2) N/A

3 - CSD preferred 0 - Never Attach 129 "" - Empty, National

Address, 129 Type

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 62 of 272

Example:

AT&F OK 5.2 AT&W Store Configuration Profile

Description Stores the current volatile memory is supported user profile to non Test if the command

Command AT&W[=][<profile>]

Possible Responses OK ERROR

AT&W=?

supported

&W: (list of

profile ids)

Description: This command stores the current profile in non-volatile memory. The profile in non-volatile memory is mapped to the <profile> parameter. If a profile exists in non-volatile memory for <profile>, it is overwritten with the current profile. See the AT&F description for a list of all parameter settings stored in the configuration profile. Defined values:
< profile> 0 Description Stores current profile to location <profile>. (Only profile 0

is supported)

5.3

ATZ

Restore Configuration Profile

Description Execute Show if supported and range

Command ATZ[=][<profile>] ATZ=?

Possible Responses OK ERROR Z: (list of

list available parameter

supported

profile ids)

Description: This command instructs the DCE to restore the configuration profile from non-volatile memory that corresponds to <profile> . Consider hardware configuration switches or non-volatile parameter storage (if implemented) when using this command. The current profile is replaced with the configuration profile from non-volatile memory. PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 63 of 272

Commands included on the same command line as the Z command will be ignored. See AT&F for a list of parameters available in a configuration profile. Defined values:
<profile> 0 Description Select the profile to restore. (Only profile 0 is supported)

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 64 of 272

Time Commands
6.1 AT+CCLK Set Clock and Date

Description Set the real time clock of the ME

Command AT+CCLK=<time>

Possible Responses +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CCLK?

+CCLK: <time> +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CCLK=?

OK ERROR

Description: Sets the real time clock of the ME. If setting fails in an ME, error +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. Read command returns the current setting of the clock. Defined values:
<time> string Description indicate year (four digits), month, day, hour, minutes, Format is yyyy/MM/dd,hh:mm:sszz, where characters

seconds and time zone (indicates the difference, expressed in quarters of an hour, between the local time and GMT; hours reads 94/05/06,22:10:00+08 range -47...+48), e.g. 6th of May 1994, 22:10:00 GMT+2

Example: AT+CCLK? +CCLK: 00/01/01,22:54:48+00 OK AT+CCLK=19/11/02,09:30:00+00 OK

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 65 of 272

Data - CSD
7.1 AT+CBST Select Bearer Service Type

Description Select bearer

Command AT+CBST=[<speed>, [<name>,[<ce>]]] AT+CBST?

Possible Responses OK ERROR +CBST:

service type Show the current setting

<speed>,<name>, <ce> OK ERROR

Test if the

command is supported

AT+CBST=?

+CBST: (list of supported <speed>s,list of supported <name>s, list of supported <ce>s) OK ERROR

Description: Selects the bearer service <name> with data rate <speed>, and the connection element <ce> to be used when data calls are originated. Values may also be used during mobile terminated data call setup, especially in the case of single numbering scheme calls. Test command returns values supported by the TA as compound values. Defined values:
<speed> 0 Description Auto selection of speed. Only possible in case of 3.1 kHz modem and non-transparent service. Default value 7 12 14 15 16 17 39 9600 bps V.32 9600 bps V.34 14400 bps V.34 19200 bps V.34 28800 bps V.34 33600 bps V.34 9600 bps (V.120)

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 66 of 272

<speed> 43 47 48 49 50 51 71 75 79 80 81 82 83 84

Description 14400 bps (V.120) 19200 bps (V.120) 28800 bps (V.120) 38400 bps (V.120) 48000 bps (V.120) 56000 bps (V.120) 9600 bps V.110 (ISDN) 14400 bps V.110 (ISDN) 19200 bps V.110 (ISDN) 28800 bps V.110 (ISDN) 38400 bps V.110 (ISDN) 48000 bps V.110 (ISDN) 56000 bps V.110 (ISDN) 64000 bps (X.31 flag stuffing)

<name> 0 4

Description Asynchronous connection (UDI or 3.1 KHz modem). Default value. Data circuit asynchronous (RDI)

<ce> 0 1

Description Transparent Non transparent. Default value.

7.2

AT+CRLP

Radio Link Protocol

Description Set radio link protocol Show the current setting

Command AT+CRLP=[<iws> [,<mws>[,<T1> >]]]]] [,<N2>[,<ver>[,<T4 AT+CRLP?

Possible Responses OK ERROR

<iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N 2>,<ver1>[,<T4>] <CR><LF>

+CRLP:

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 67 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Responses +CRLP: <iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N 2>,<ver2>[,<T4>] [...]] OK ERROR

Test if the command is

AT+CRLP=?

<iws>s), (list of

+CRLP: (list of supported

supported <mws>s), (list of supported <T1>s), (list of

supported

supported<N2>s),<ver1 >[,(list of supported <T4>s]

[<CR><LF>+CRLP: (list of supported <iws>s), (list of supported <mws>s), (list of of supported

supported <T1>s), (list <N2>s),<ver2>[,(list of supported <T4>s][...]] OK ERROR

Description: Radio link protocol (RLP) parameters used when non-transparent data calls are originated may be altered with this command. Available command subparameters depend on the RLP versions implemented by the device. Read command returns current settings for each supported RLP version <verx>. Only RLP parameters applicable to the corresponding <verx> are returned. Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value. Defined values:
<iws> Supported values 1 to 61 Description IWF to MS window size. Default value is 61.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 68 of 272

<mws> Supported values 1 to 61

Description MS to IWF window size. Default value is 61.

<T1> Supported values 38 to 100

Description Acknowledgment timer T1 (*10ms). Default value is 59.

<N2> Supported values 0 to 255

Description Re-transmission attempts N2. Default value is 6.

<T4> 3 - 255

Description Re-sequencing period T4 (*10ms). Default value is 5. Only applicable to V2

<ver> Integer 0, 1, 2

Description RLP version. Note: versions 0 and 1 share the same parameter set.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 69 of 272

Data - GPRS
8.1 AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate

Description Activate or deactivate the specified PDP context(s) Read the command

Command AT+CGACT=<state> [,<cid>[,<cid>]]]

Possible Responses +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

AT+CGACT?

<state>[<CR><LF> +CGACT: <cid>, <state>[]] OK ERROR

+CGACT: <cid>,

Test if the

command is supported

AT+CGACT=?

supported <state>s) OK ERROR

+CGACT: (list of

Description: Used to activate or deactivate the specified PDP context(s). Before a context may be activated it must be defined by the command AT+CGDCONT. If a context is not already attached to the GPRS network then this command will automatically attach before attempting the activation. After the command has completed, the MS remains in V.250 command state. If the MS is already in the requested state, the command is ignored and OK is returned. If the requested state cannot be achieved, ERROR or +CME ERROR is returned. If the MS is not attached to the GPRS service when the activation form of the command is executed, the MS first performs a GPRS attach and then attempts to activate the specific contexts. If no <cid>s are specified, then the activation form of the command activates all defined contexts and the deactivation form of the command deactivates all active contexts. Defined values:
<state> 0 1 Description PDP context activation deactivated PDP context activation activated

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 70 of 272

<cid> Integer

Description Reference to a PDP context identifier previously defined with AT+CGDCONT

8.2

AT+CGCMOD PDP Context Modify

Description Activate or deactivate the specified PDP context(s) Test if the

Command AT+CGCMOD=[<cid> [,<cid>[,[,]]]

Possible Responses OK ERROR

command is supported

AT+CGCMOD=?

<cid>s associated with active contexts)

+CGCMOD: (list of

Description: The execution command is used to modify the specified PDP context(s) with respect to QoS profiles and TFTs. After the command has completed, the MT returns to V.25ter online data state. If the requested modification for any specified context cannot be achieved, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned. Extended error responses are enabled by the +CMEE command. If no <cid>s are specified, the activation form of the command modifies all active contexts. The test command returns a list of <cid>s associated with active contexts. Defined values:
<cid> Integer type Description See AT+CGDCONT command for range

8.3

AT+CGATT

GPRS Attach or Detach

Description Attach or detach MS to the GPRS/packet domain/packet domain service

Command AT+CGATT=[<state>]

Possible

Responses +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CGATT?

<state>

+CGATT:

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 71 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Responses OK ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGATT=?

+CGATT: (list of supported <state>s) OK ERROR

Description: Used to attach the MS to, or detach the MS from, the GPRS/packet domain service. After the command has completed, the MS remains in V.250 command state. If the MS is already in the requested state, the command is ignored and the OK response is returned. If the requested state cannot be achieved, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned. Extended error responses (enabled by the +CMEE command) are listed under +CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code). Any active PDP contexts will be automatically deactivated when the attachment state changes to detached. Note: The unit software is automatically hard coded to attach to a GPRS network therefore entering this command as part of the initialization sequence is not required. Note: This command has the characteristics of both the V.250 action and parameter commands. Hence it has the read form in addition to the execution/set and test forms. Defined values:
<state> 0 1 Description Detached Attached

8.4

AT+CGCLASS GPRS Mobile Station Class

Description Set class Read current class

Syntax AT+CGCLASS=<class> AT+CGCLASS?

Possible Responses OK ERROR <class> ERROR +CGCLASS:

Test if the

command is

AT+CGCLASS=?

of supported

+CGCLASS: (list

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 72 of 272

Description supported

Syntax

Possible Responses <class>s)

Description: The set command is used to set the specified GPRS/Packet Domain mobile class. If the requested class is not supported, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned. The read command returns the current mode of operation set by the TE, independent of serving cell capability and serving cell Access Technology. If no value has been set by the TE previously, the return value shall be the highest mode of operation that can be supported. The test command returns the supported <class>s. Defined values:
<class> A B CG CC Description Class A (GPRS) or PS/CS mode (UMTS) Class B (value does not apply to UMTS) Class C packet only (GPRS) or PS mode (UMTS) Class C CS only (GPRS) or CS mode (UMTS)

8.5

AT+CGDATA

Enter Data State

Description Establish domain

Command AT+CGDATA=[<L2p>,[cid[,cid>[, ]]]]

Possible Responses CONNECT ERROR OK ERROR

GPRS/packet connection Test if the command is supported

AT+CGDATA=?

+CGDATA: (list of supported <L2P>s) OK ERROR

Description: The execution command causes the ME to perform whatever actions are necessary to establish communication between the TE and the network using one or more GPRS/Packet Domain PDP types. This may include performing a GPRS/Packet Domain attach and one or more PDP context activations. If the <L2P> parameter value is unacceptable to the ME, the ME returns an ERROR or +CME ERROR response. Otherwise, the ME issues the intermediate result code CONNECT and enters V.25ter online data PC300 AT Command Manual Page 73 of 272 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

state. Commands following +CGDATA command in the AT command line are not processed by the ME. During each PDP startup procedure the ME may have access to some or all of the following information The command may have provided an <L2P> parameter value. The TE may provide a PDP type and/or PDP address to the ME during in the PDP startup procedure. If any of this information is in conflict, the command will fail. Any PDP type and/or PDP address present in the above information are compared with the PDP type and/or PDP address in any context definitions specified in the command in the order in which their <cid>s appear. For a context definition to match The PDP type must match exactly. The PDP addresses are considered to match if they are identical or if either or both addresses are unspecified. For example, a PPP NCP request specifying PDP type = IP and no PDP address would cause the ME to search through the specified context definitions for one with PDP type = IP and any PDP address. The context shall be activated using the matched value for PDP type and a static PDP address if available, together with the other information found in the PDP context definition. If a static PDP address is not available then a dynamic address is requested. If no <cid> is given or if there is no matching context definition, the ME shall attempt to activate the context with whatever information is available to the ME. The other context parameters shall be set to their default values. If the activation is successful, data transfer may proceed. After data transfer is complete, and the layer 2 protocol termination procedure has completed successfully, the V.25ter command state is re-entered and the ME returns the final result code OK. In the event of an erroneous termination or a failure to start up, the V.25ter command state is re-entered and the ME returns the final result code NO CARRIER or, if enabled, +CME ERROR. Attach, activate and other errors may be reported. Defined values:
<L2P> PPP Description Point-to-point protocol for a PDP such as IP

<cid> Integer type

Description See +CGDCONT for definition of <cid>

8.6

AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 74 of 272

Description Select PDP context parameters

Command AT+CGDCONT=[<cid> [,<PDP_type>[,<APN> [,<PDP_addr> [,<d_comp>

Possible Responses +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

[,<h_comp> [,<pd1> [,...[,pdN]]]]]]]]] Read the command AT+CGDCONT? +CGDCONT: <cid>,

<PDP_type>,<APN>, >,

<PDP_addr>,<d_comp <h_comp>[,<pd1>[,...[ ,pdN>]]] [<CR><LF>+CGDCON T: <cid>, <PDP_type>,<APN>, >,

<PDP_addr>,<d_comp <h_comp>[,<pd1>[,...[ ,pdN>]]] []] OK ERROR Test if the command is supported AT+CGDCONT=? +CGDCONT: (range of supported <cid>s), supported <PDP_type>,,,(list of <d_comp>s), <h_comp>s) <pd1>s)

(list of supported [,(list of supported [,[,(list of supported <pdN>s)]]] [<CR><LF>+CGDCON T: (range of supported <cid>s), <PDP_type>,,, (list of supported supported OK <d_comp>s), (list of <h_comp>s) []]

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 75 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Responses ERROR

Description: Specifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context identified by the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>. If the parameter list is empty, the table will be cleared. If just the <cid> is specified then that entry will be cleared but the rest of the table will stay intact. PDP context table entries may only be cleared if the context is not activated. When the PDP context is activated a dynamic IP address will be filled into the table entry by the network. If the network supports it, then a static IP address may be filled in and will be used when activating the context. When the context is deactivated the IP address will be removed from the table if it is a dynamic IP but a static IP will remain. Defined values:
<cid> Integer type Description (PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition. The parameter is local to the TE-MS interface and is used in other PDP context-related commands. The range of test form of the command 1-10 Supported values permitted values (minimum value = 1) is returned by the

<PDP_type> IP IPV6

Description Internet Protocol, version 4 (IETF STD 5) (Default) Internet Protocol, version 6 (IETF RFC 2460)

<APN> String type

Description (Access Point Name) a string parameter which is a logical name that is used to select the GGSN or the

external packet data network. If the value is null or omitted, then the subscription value will be requested

<PDP_addr> String type

Description A string parameter that identifies the MS in the address space applicable to the PDP. If the value is null or omitted, then a value may be provided by the

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 76 of 272

<PDP_addr>

Description TE during the PDP startup procedure or, failing that, a dynamic address will be requested

<d_comp> 0 1 2

Description PDP data compression OFF (Default) PDP data compression ON V.42bis

<h_comp> 0 1 2...255

Description PDP header compression OFF (Default) PDP header compression ON Reserved

<PdN> String type

Description Zero to N string parameters whose meanings are specific to the <PDP_type> Not supported

8.7

AT+CGDSCONT

Define Secondary PDP Context

Description Select PDP secondary context

Command AT+CGDSCONT=[<cid> ,<p_cid> [,<PDP_type> [,<d_comp> [,<h_comp>]]]] AT+CGDSCONT?

Possible Responses OK ERROR

parameters Read the command

<p_cid>,<d_comp>, <h_comp> [<CR><LF>+CGDSC ONT: <cid>, <h_comp> []] OK ERROR <p_cid>,<d_comp>,

+CGDSCONT: <cid>,

Test if the

AT+CGDSCONT=?

+CGDSCONT: (range

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 77 of 272

Description command is supported

Command

Possible Responses of supported <cid>s), (list of <cid>s for active primary contexts),(list of supported supported <PDP_type>s), (list of <d_comp>s), <h_comp>s) OK ERROR

(list of supported

Description: The set command specifies PDP context parameter values for a Secondary PDP context identified by the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>. The number of PDP contexts that may be in a defined state at the same time is given by the range returned by the test command. A special form of the set command, +CGDSCONT= <cid> causes the values for context number <cid> to become undefined. The read command returns the current settings for each defined context. Note: If <cid> states an already existing, primary context, this will be converted to a secondary one, provided of course, that stated <p_cid> is a different and existing primary account defined with +CGDCONT. Note that any secondary contexts attached to the converted context disappears. Defined values:
<cid> Integer type Description (PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition. The parameter is local to the TE-MS interface and is used in other PDP context-related commands. The range of test form of the command 1-20 Supported values permitted values (minimum value = 1) is returned by the

<p_cid> Integer type

Description (Primary PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition which

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 78 of 272

<p_cid>

Description has been specified by use of the +CGDCONT command. The parameter is local to the TE-ME interface.

<PDP_type> "IP" "IPV6"

Description Internet Protocol (IP Version 4) Internet Protocol (IP Version 6)

<d_comp> 0 1 2

Description PDP data compression OFF (Default) PDP data compression ON V.42bis

<h_comp> 0 1 2...255

Description PDP header compression OFF (Default) PDP header compression ON Reserved

8.8

AT+CGEREP

GPRS Event Reporting

Description Set command

Command AT+CGEREP=[<mode > [,<bfr>]] AT+CGEREP?

Possible Responses +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR +CGEREP: OK ERROR <mode>,<bfr>

Read the

command

Test if the

command is supported

AT+CGEREP=?

supported <mode>s), (list of supported <bfr>s) OK ERROR

+CGEREP: (list of

Description: PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 79 of 272

Enables or disables GPRS event reporting via unsolicted result codes. <mode> controls the processing of unsolicited result codes specified within this command. <bfr> controls the effect on buffered codes when <mode> 1 or 2 is entered. See +CGEV for a description of the unsolicited response format. Defined values:
<mode> 0 Description Buffer unsolicited result codes in the MT. No codes are oldest ones can be discarded. 1 forwarded to the TE. If MT result code buffer is full, the

Discard unsolicited result codes when MT-TE link is reserved (e.g. in onlne data mode); otherwise forward them directly to the TE. (online data mode indication is currently not available, therefore link is assuemed to be not reserved)

<bfr> 0

Description command is cleared when <mode> 1 or 2 is entered MT buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this

8.8.1

+CGEV

GPRS Event Reporting

Description: The +CGEV unsolicited messages are enabled or disabled by the AT+CGEREP command. The format of the unsolicited report is: +CGEV: <XXX> Defined values:
<XXX> +CGEV: NW DEACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>[,<cid>] +CGEV: ME DEACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>[,<cid>] +CGEV: NW DETACH Description The network has forced a context deactivation. The <cid> that was used to activate the context is provided if known. The mobile equipment has forced a was used to activate the context is provided if known. The network has forced a

context deactivation. The <cid> that

GPRS/Packet Domain detach. This been deactivated. These are not reported separately

implies that all active contexts have

+CGEV: ME DETACH

The mobile equipment has forced a GPRS/Packet Domain detach. This

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 80 of 272

<XXX>

Description implies that all active contexts have been deactivated. These are not reported separately

<PDP_addr> String type

Description A string parameter that identifies the module in the address space applicable to the PDP. If the value is null or omitted, then a value may be provided by the TE during the PDP startup procedure or, failing that, a dynamic address will be requested

<PDP_type> IP

Description Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)

<cid> Integer type

Description See AT+CGDCONT command for range

8.9

AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address

Description Show PDP addresses for specified CIDs

Command AT+CGPADDR=[<cid> [,<cid> [,]]]

Possible Responses +CGPADDR: <cid>,<PDP_addr> <cid>,<PDP_addr> [...]] OK ERROR [<CR><LF>+CGPADDR:

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGPADDR=?

+CGPADDR: (list of defined <cid>s) OK ERROR

Description: Returns a list of PDP addresses for the specified context identifiers. The test command returns a list of defined <cid>s. An IP address is only assigned to a PDP context if the context is activated (see +CGACT) or if the IP address has been staticly assigned by the user via +CGDCONT. Defined values: PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 81 of 272

<cid> Integer type

Description Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see +CGDCONT command). If no <cid> is specified, the addresses for all defined contexts are returned

<PDP_address> String type

Description applicable to the PDP. The address may be static or dynamic. For a static address, it will be the one set by the +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands when the context was defined. For a dynamic PDP context activation that used the context omitted if none is available A string that identifies the MS in the address space

address it will be the one assigned during the last definition referred to by <cid>. <PDP_address> is

8.10

AT+CGEQMIN 3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)

Description set a profile for the context

Command AT+CGEQMIN=[<cid> [,<Traffic class> [,<Maximum bitrate UL>

Possible OK ERROR

Response(s)

identified by the (local) context

[,<Maximum bitrate DL>

[,<Guaranteed bitrate UL> [,<Delivery order>

identification parameter

[,<Guaranteed bitrate DL> [,<Maximum SDU size> [,<SDU error ratio> [,<Residual bit error ratio> [,<Delivery of erroneous [,<Traffic handling priority>]]]]]]]]]]]]] SDUs> [,<Transfer delay>

Read the current setting

AT+CGEQMIN?

+CGEQMIN: <cid>, <Traffic class> ,<Maximum

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 82 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Response(s) bitrate UL>, <Maximum bitrate DL> bitrate UL> ,<Guaranteed ,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>, <Delivery order>

,<Maximum SDU size> ,<SDU error ratio> error ratio> erroneous SDUs> ,<Residual bit ,<Delivery of

,<Transfer handling

delay> ,<Traffic priority> [<CR><LF> +CGEQMIN: class> <cid>, <Traffic ,<Maximum bitrate UL> ,<Maximum bitrate DL> bitrate UL> ,<Guaranteed ,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>, <Delivery order>

,<Maximum SDU size> ,<SDU error ratio> error ratio> erroneous SDUs> ,<Residual bit ,<Delivery of

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 83 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Response(s) ,<Transfer delay> ,<Traffic handling []] priority>

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGEQMIN=?

+CGEQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of supported ,(list of

<Traffic class>s) supported

<Maximum bitrate UL>s) ,(list of supported

<Maximum (list of

bitrate DL>s), supported

<Guaranteed (list of

bitrate UL>s), supported

<Guaranteed ,(list of

bitrate DL>s) supported <Delivery order>s) ,(list of supported <Maximum SDU size>s) ,(list of error ratio>s) ,(list of supported supported <SDU

<Residual bit ,(list of

error ratio>s) supported erroneous

<Delivery of

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 84 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Response(s) SDUs>s) ,(list of supported <Transfer delay>s) ,(list of supported <Traffic handling

priority>s) [<CR><LF> +CGEQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of supported ,(list of

<Traffic class>s) supported

<Maximum bitrate UL>s), (list of supported

<Maximum ,(list of

bitrate DL>s) supported

<Guaranteed (list of

bitrate UL >s), supported

<Guaranteed ,(list of

bitrate DL >s) supported <Delivery order>s) ,(list of supported <Maximum SDU size>s) ,(list of error ratio>s) ,(list of supported supported <SDU

<Residual bit

error ratio>s)

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 85 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Response(s) ,(list of supported erroneous <Delivery of SDUs>s) ,(list of supported <Transfer

delay>s) ,(list of supported <Traffic handling []]

priority>s)

Description This command allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile, which is checked by the MT against the negotiated profile returned in the Activate/Modify PDP Context Accept message. The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>. The specified profile will be stored in the MT and checked against the negotiated profile only at activation or MS-initiated modification of the related context. Since this is the same parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT and +GGDSCONT commands, the +CGEQMIN command is effectively an extension to these commands. The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may be set to a separate value. A special form of the set command, +CGEQMIN= <cid> causes the minimum acceptable profile for context number <cid> to be returned to the default values. In this case no check is made against the negotiated profile. The read command returns the current settings for each defined context. The test command returns values supported as a compound value. The parameter value ranges for each PDP type are returned on a separate line. The QoS profiles for PDP contexts are part of the configuration profile. The default setting for every PDP context is an empty QoS profile. Executing AT&F restores the QoS profile for all PDP contexts to the empty profile. To commit the QoS profile for all PDP contexts to non-volatile memory, AT&W must be executed. Defined values
<cid> Description See AT+CGDCONT for range of <cid>.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 86 of 272

<cid>

Description NOTE: is is not necessary to define a <cid> value using +CGDCONT before setting the QoS values using this command.

The following parameters are defined in 3GPP TS 23.107 <Traffic class> Integer format 0 1 2 3 Description A numeric parameter that indicates the type of optimised. Streaming Interactive Background (Default)

application for which the UMTS bearer service is Conversational

<Maximum bitrate UL> Integer

Description UMTS. Maximum number of kbit/s delivered to

Ericsson Specific note: With reference to the integer values are valid. Thus upon setting this parameter, the value is

3GPP TS 24.008 subclause 10.5.6.5, not all

rounded down to the nearest valid value. It then follows that reading back this than that used upon setting. 0...384 requested) parameter may produce a different value Default 0 (Subscribed value will be

<Maximum bitrate DL> Integer

Description UMTS. Maximum number of kbit/s delivered by

See note under <Maximum bitrate UL> 0...3648 Default 0 (Subscribed value will be requested)

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 87 of 272

<Guaranteed bitrate UL> Integer

Description A numeric parameter that indicates the guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link deliver). traffic) at a SAP (provided that there is data to See note under <Maximum bitrate UL>

0...384

Default 0 (Subscribed value will be requested)

<Guaranteed bitrate DL> Integer

Description A numeric parameter that indicates the guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that there is data to deliver). See note under <Maximum bitrate UL>

0...3648

Default 0 (Subscribed value will be requested)

<Delivery order> Type 0 1 Integer

Description A numeric parameter that indicates whether the UMTS bearer shall provide in-sequence SDU delivery or not. No Yes

<Maximum SDU size> Integer

Description Indicates the maximum allowed SDU size in octets

Note: With reference to 3GPP TS 24.008 subclause 10.5.6.5, not all the integer values are valid. The down to the nearest valid value. that given.

general rule is then that the integer will be rounded It is therefore possible to read out a value other than 0...1502 Default 0 (Subscribed value will be requested)

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 88 of 272

<SDU error ratio> String

Description Indicates the target value for the fraction of SDUs lost or

detected as erroneous. SDU error ratio is defined only for conforming traffic. The value is specified as 'mEe'. As an example a target SDU error ratio of 510-3 would be specified as '5E3' (e.g. AT+CGEQMIN=,5E3,).

<Residual bit ratio> String error

Description Indicates the target value for the undetected bit error

ratio in the delivered SDUs. If no error detection is

requested, Residual bit error ratio indicates the bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. The value is specified as 510-3 would be specified as '5E3' (e.g. AT+CGEQMIN=,5E3,) 'mEe'. As an example a target residual bit error ratio of

<Delivery erroneous SDUs> Integer Type

of

Description A numeric parameter that indicates whether

SDUs detected as erroneous shall be delivered or not. No Yes No detection or erroneous SDUs (Default)

0 1 2

<Transfer delay> Integer

Description The targeted time between request to transfer an SDU at one SAP to its delivery at the other SAP, in milliseconds.

0...254

Default 0 (Subscribed value will be requested)

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 89 of 272

<Traffic handling Integer priority>

Description Specifies the relative importance for handling of all

SDUs belonging to the UMTS bearer compared to the SDUs of other bearers. Default 0 (Subscribed value will be requested)

0...3

<PDP_type> String

Description See +CGDCONT command

If a value is omitted for a particular class then the value is considered to be unspecified. 8.11 AT+CGEQNEG 3G Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated)

Description Retrieves the negotiated QoS profiles

Command +CGEQNEG =[<cid>[,<cid>[,]]]

Possible Response(s) +CGEQNEG: <cid>, <Traffic class> ,<Maximum bitrate UL>, <Maximum bitrate DL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>, <Guaranteed bitrate DL> ,<Delivery

order> ,<Maximum SDU ,<Residual bit error erroneous SDUs>

size> ,<SDU error ratio> ratio> ,<Delivery of ,<Transfer delay> ,<Traffic handling priority> [<CR><LF> +CGEQNEG: <cid>, <Traffic class> ,<Maximum bitrate UL>, <Maximum bitrate DL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>, <Guaranteed bitrate DL> ,<Delivery

order> ,<Maximum SDU ,<Residual bit error

size> ,<SDU error ratio>

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 90 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Response(s) ratio> ,<Delivery of erroneous SDUs> ,<Transfer delay> ,<Traffic handling priority> []]

Test if the command is supported

+CGEQNEG=?

+CGEQNEG: (list of <cid>s associated with active contexts)

Description This command allows the TE to retrieve the negotiated QoS profiles returned in the Activate PDP Context Accept message. The execution command returns the negotiated QoS profile for the specified context identifiers, <cid>s. The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may have a separate value. The test command returns a list of <cid>s associated with active contexts. Defined values <cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see +CGDCONT command). The following parameters are defined in 3GPP TS 23.107 [46] <Traffic class> Integer format 0 1 2 3 Description A numeric parameter that indicates the type of optimised. Streaming Interactive Background Other values are reserved.

application for which the UMTS bearer service is Conversational

<Maximum bitrate UL> Integer Type

Description A numeric parameter that indicates the maximum

number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) specified as '32' (e.g. +CGEQNEG:,32, ).

at a SAP. As an example a bitrate of 32kbit/s would be

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 91 of 272

<Maximum bitrate DL> Integer Type

Description A numeric parameter that indicates the maximum number of kbits/s delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP As an example a bitrate of 32kbit/s

would be specified as '32' (e.g. +CGEQNEG:,32, ).

<Guaranteed bitrate UL> Integer Type

Description Anumeric parameter that indicates the guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) example a bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g. +CGEQNEG:,32, ). at a SAP (provided that there is data to deliver). As an

<Guaranteed bitrate DL> Integer Type

Description Anumeric parameter that indicates the guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that there is data to

deliver). As an example a bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g. +CGEQNEG:,32, ).

<Delivery order> Integer Type 0 1

Description A numeric parameter that indicates whether the UMTS bearer shall provide in-sequence SDU delivery or not. No Yes Other values are reserved.

<Maximum size> Integer Type 0...1502

SDU

Description A numeric parameter that indicates the maximum allowed SDU size in octets.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 92 of 272

<SDU error ratio> String Type

Description A string parameter that indicates the target value for the ratio is defined only for conforming traffic. The value is of 510-3 would be specified as '5E3' (e.g. +CGEQNEG:,5E3,).

fraction of SDUs lost or detected as erroneous. SDU error specified as 'mEe'. As an example a target SDU error ratio

<Residual bit ratio> String Type error

Description A string parameter that indicates the target value for the undetected bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. If no error detection is requested, Residual bit error ratio value is specified as 'mEe'. As an example a target '5E3' (e.g. +CGEQNEG:,5E3,).

indicates the bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. The residual bit error ratio of 510-3 would be specified as

<Delivery erroneous SDUs> Integer Type

of

Description A numeric parameter that indicates whether not.

SDUs detected as erroneous shall be delivered or

0 1 2

No Yes No detection of erroneous SDUs Other values are reserved.

<Transfer delay> Integer Type

Description A numeric parameter (0,1,2,) that indicates the

targeted time between request to transfer an SDU at

one SAP to its delivery at the other SAP, in milliseconds.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 93 of 272

<Traffic priority>

handling

Description a numeric parameter (1,2,3,) that specifies the relative importance for handling of all SDUs belonging to the UMTS bearer compared to the SDUs of other bearers.

Integer Type

If a value is omitted for a particular class then the value is considered to be unspecified. 8.12 AT+CGEQREQ 3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested)

Description Specify a UMTS Quality of Service Profile

Command +CGEQREQ=[<cid> [,<Traffic class> [,<Maximum bitrate UL>

Possible Response(s) OK ERROR

[,<Maximum bitrate DL>

[,<Guaranteed bitrate UL> [,<Delivery order>

[,<Guaranteed bitrate DL> [,<Maximum SDU size> [,<SDU error ratio> [,<Residual bit error ratio> [,<Delivery of erroneous [,<Traffic handling priority> ]]]]]]]]]]]]] SDUs> [,<Transfer delay>

Read the current setting

+CGEQREQ?

<Traffic class>

+CGEQREQ: <cid>,

,<Maximum bitrate UL> ,<Maximum bitrate DL>

,<Guaranteed bitrate UL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate DL> ,<Delivery order> ,<Maximum SDU size> ,<SDU error error ratio>

ratio> ,<Residual bit ,<Delivery of

erroneous SDUs>

,<Transfer delay> ,<Traffic handling

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 94 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Response(s) priority> [<CR><LF> +CGEQREQ: <cid>, <Traffic class> ,<Maximum bitrate UL> ,<Maximum bitrate DL>

,<Guaranteed bitrate UL> ,<Guaranteed bitrate DL> ,<Delivery order> ,<Maximum SDU size> ,<SDU error error ratio>

ratio> ,<Residual bit ,<Delivery of

erroneous SDUs>

,<Transfer delay> ,<Traffic handling priority> []] Test if the command is supported +CGEQREQ=? +CGEQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <Traffic class>s) ,(list of supported

<Maximum bitrate UL>s), (list of supported

<Maximum bitrate DL>s), (list of supported

<Guaranteed bitrate UL>s), (list of supported

<Guaranteed bitrate DL>s),(list of supported <Delivery order>s) ,(list of supported <Maximum SDU size>s) ,(list of supported <SDU

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 95 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Response(s) error ratio>s) ,(list of supported <Residual bit error ratio>s) <Delivery of ,(list of supported erroneous SDUs>s) ,(list of supported ,(list of supported <Traffic handling priority>s) [<CR><LF> +CGEQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <Traffic class>s) ,(list of supported <Transfer delay>s)

<Maximum bitrate UL>s), (list of supported <Maximum bitrate DL>s), (list of supported

<Guaranteed bitrate UL>s), (list of supported

<Guaranteed bitrate DL>s),(list of supported <Delivery order>s) ,(list of supported <Maximum SDU size>s) ,(list of supported <SDU

error ratio>s) ,(list of supported <Residual bit error ratio>s) <Delivery of ,(list of supported erroneous SDUs>s) ,(list of supported ,(list of supported <Traffic handling <Transfer delay>s)

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 96 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Response(s) priority>s) []]

Description This command allows the TE to specify a UMTS Quality of Service Profile that is used when the MT sends an Activate PDP Context Request message to the network. The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>. The specified profile will be stored in the MT and sent to the network only at activation or MS-initiated modification of the related context. Since this is the same parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGEQREQ command is effectively an extension to this command. The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may be set to a separate value. A special form of the set command, +CGEQREQ= <cid> causes the requested profile for context number <cid> to reset to the default QoS values.. The read command returns the current settings for each defined context. The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT supports several PDP types, the parameter value ranges for each PDP type are returned on a separate line. The QoS profiles for PDP contexts are part of the configuration profile. The default setting for every PDP context is an empty QoS profile. Executing AT&F restores the QoS profile for all PDP contexts to the empty profile. To commit the QoS profile for all PDP contexts to non-volatile memory, AT&W must be executed. Defined values <cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see +CGDCONT command). The following parameters are defined in 3GPP TS 23.107 <Traffic class> Integer format 0 1 2 3 Description A numeric parameter that indicates the type of application for which the UMTS bearer service is optimised. Streaming Interactive Background Other values are reserved. Conversational

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 97 of 272

If the Traffic class is specified as conversational or streaming, then the Guaranteed and Maximum bitrate parameters should also be provided. Other values are reserved. <Maximum bitrate UL>: A numeric parameter that indicates the maximum number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP. As an example, a bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g. AT+CGEQREQ=...,32,...). This parameter should be provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or streaming. <Maximum bitrate DL>: A numeric parameter that indicates the maximum number of kbits/s delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP. As an example a bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g. AT+CGEQREQ=...,32,...). If the parameter is set to '0' the subscribed value will be requested. This parameter should be provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or streaming. <Guaranteed bitrate UL>: A numeric parameter that indicates the guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that there is data to deliver). As an example a bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g. AT+CGEQREQ=...,32,...). If the parameter is set to '0' the subscribed value will be requested. This parameter should be provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or streaming. <Guaranteed bitrate DL>: A numeric parameter that indicates the guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that there is data to deliver). As an example a bitrate of 32kbit/s would be specified as '32' (e.g. AT+CGEQREQ=...,32,...). If the parameter is set to '0' the subscribed value will be requested. This parameter should be provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or streaming.
<Delivery order> Type Integer Type 0 1 Integer Description A numeric parameter that indicates whether the UMTS bearer shall provide in-sequence SDU delivery or not. A numeric parameter that indicates whether the GPRS bearer shall provide in-sequence SDU delivery or not. No Yes Other values are reserved.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 98 of 272

<Maximum SDU size>: A numeric parameter (1, 2, 3, ) that indicates the maximum allowed SDU size in octets. If the parameter is set to '0' the subscribed value will be requested. <SDU error ratio>: A string parameter that indicates the target value for the fraction of SDUs lost or detected as erroneous. SDU error ratio is defined only for conforming traffic. The value is specified as 'mEe'. As an example a target SDU error ratio of 510-3 would be specified as '5E3' (e.g. AT+CGEQREQ=...,"5E3",...). '0E0' means subscribed value. <Residual bit error ratio>: A string parameter that indicates the target value for the undetected bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. If no error detection is requested, Residual bit error ratio indicates the bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. The value is specified as 'mEe'. As an example a target residual bit error ratio of 510-3 would be specified as '5E3' (e.g. AT+CGEQREQ=...,"5E3",...). '0E0' means subscribed value. <Delivery of erroneous SDUs>: A numeric parameter that indicates whether SDUs detected as erroneous shall be delivered or not. 0 no 1 yes 2 no detect 3 subscribed value Other values are reserved. <Transfer delay>: A numeric parameter (0, 1, 2, ) that indicates the targeted time between request to transfer an SDU at one SAP to its delivery at the other SAP, in milliseconds. If the parameter is set to '0' the subscribed value will be requested. <Traffic handling priority>: A numeric parameter (1, 2, 3, ) that specifies the relative importance for handling of all SDUs belonging to the UMTS bearer compared to the SDUs of other bearers. If the parameter is set to '0' the subscribed value will be requested. <PDP_type>: (see +CGDCONT command). If a value is omitted for a particular class then the value is considered to be unspecified. 8.13 AT+CGQMIN Acceptable) Quality of Service Profile (Minimum

Description Set minimum acceptable

Command AT+CGQMIN=[<cid> [,<precedence> [,<delay>

Possible Responses +CME ERROR: <err> OK

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 99 of 272

Description profile

Command [,<peak> [,<reliability>

Possible Responses ERROR

[,<mean>]]]]]] Show the current setting AT+CGQMIN? +CGQMIN: <cid>, <precedence>, <delay>, <reliability>, <peak>, QMIN: <cid>, <mean>[<CR><LF>+CG <precedence>, <delay>, <reliability>, <peak>, <mean>[]] OK ERROR Test if the command is AT+CGQMIN=? +CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <precedence>s), (list of of supported

supported

supported <delay>s), (list <reliability>s) , (list of of supported

supported <peak>s), (list <mean>s)[<CR><LF>+C GQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <precedence>s), (list of of supported

supported <delay>s), (list <reliability>s) , (list of of supported OK ERROR

supported <peak>s), (list <mean>s)[]]

Description: Note that this command is present for compatibility only. This command is a dummy only and the +CGEQMIN command must be used instead. 8.14 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested)

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 100 of 272

Description Set quality of service profile

Command AT+CGQREQ=[<cid> [,<precedence> [,<delay> [,<peak> [,<reliability> [,<mean>]]]]]]

Possible Responses +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CGQREQ?

<precedence>, <delay>, <reliability>, <peak>, <mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence>, <peak>, <mean>[]] OK ERROR <delay>, <reliability>,

+CGQREQ: <cid>,

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGQREQ=?

+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <precedence>s), (list of supported <delay>s), (list of supported <reliability>s),

(list of supported <peak>s), [<CR><LF>+CGQREQ:

(list of supported <mean>s) <PDP_type>, (list of supported <precedence>s), (list of supported <delay>s), (list of supported <reliability>s),

(list of supported <peak>s), (list of supported <mean>s)[]] OK ERROR

Description: Note that this command is present for compatibility only. This command is a dummy only and the +CGEQREQ command must be used. 8.15 AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 101 of 272

Description Set command

Command AT+CGREG=[<n>]

Possible Responses +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+CGREG?

<n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

+CGREG:

Test if the

command is supported.

AT+CGREG=?

supported <n>s) OK ERROR

+CGREG: (list of

Unsolicited

response if reporting is enabled

+CGREG: <stat> +CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]

Description: Controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat> when <n>=1 and there is a change in the GPRS/packet domain network registration status of the MS, or code +CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] when <n>=2 and there is a change of the network cell. The read command returns the status of result code presentation and an integer <stat> which shows whether the network has currently indicated the registration of the ME. Location information elements <lac> and <ci> are returned only when <n>=2 and ME is registered in the network. Note: If the GPRS/Packet Domain MS also supports circuit mode services, the +CGREG command and +CGREG: result code apply to the registration status and location information for circuit switched services. Defined values:
<n> 0 1 2 Description Disable network registration unsolicited result code. Default value. Enable network registration unsolicited result code Enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 102 of 272

<stat> 0 1 2 3 4 5

Description Not registered, MS is not searching for a new operator to register with Registered, home network register with Unknown Registered, roaming Not registered, but MS is searching for a new operator to

Registration denied

<lac> String type

Description Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format

<ci> String type

Description Four byte cell ID in hexadecimal format. For GSM cells, the first two bytes will be zeros.

Example: AT+CGREG=1 OK AT+CGREG? +CGREG: 0,2 OK AT+CGATT=1 OK +CGREG=1 8.15.1 +CGREG GPRS Network Unsolicited Response

Description: The ouput format is +CGREG: <stat> when <n>=1. The unsolicited response is output when there is a change in the GPRS/packet domain network registration status of the MS. This can happen when the user manually attaches or detaches to/from the GPRS network (using +CGATT or +CGACT). The module is considered registered to the network when the device is attached and it is not registered when the module is detached from the GPRS network.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 103 of 272

The code +CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] will be output when <n>=2. This event happens when there is a change of the network cell.
<stat> 0 1 2 3 4 5 Description register with Not registered, MS is not searching for a new operator to

Registered, home network register with Unknown Registered, roaming Not registered, but MS is searching for a new operator to

Registration denied

<lac> String type

Description Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format

<ci> String type

Description Four byte cell ID in hexadecimal format. For GSM cells, the first two bytes will be zeros.

8.16

AT+CGTFT

Traffic Flow Template

Description Allows the a Packet TE to specify Filter for a

Command AT+CGTFT=[<cid>, [<packet filter identifier>, <evaluation

Possible Responses OK ERROR

Traffic Flow Template TFT that is GGSN for used in the routing of packets onto

precedence index> subnet mask>

[,<source address and [,<protocol number

(ipv4) / next header

down-link

(ipv6)> [,<destination port range> [,<ipsec security parameter

port range> [,<source

different

QoS flows

index (spi)> [,<type of service (tos) (ipv4) and

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 104 of 272

Description towards the TE

Command mask / traffic class (ipv6) and mask> ]]]]]]]]] [,<flow label (ipv6)>

Possible Responses

Query template parameters

AT+CGTFT?

+CGTFT: <cid>, <packet filter identifier>, <evaluation

precedence index>, subnet mask>,

<source address and <protocol number (ipv4) / next header (ipv6)>, <destination port range>, <ipsec security parameter

port range>, <source

index (spi)>, <type of mask / traffic class (ipv6) and mask>,

service (tos) (ipv4) and

<flow label (ipv6)> <cid>, <packet filter identifier>, <evaluation [<CR><LF>+CGTFT:

precedence index>, subnet mask>,

<source address and <protocol number

(ipv4) / next header

(ipv6)>, <destination port range>, <ipsec security parameter

port range>, <source

index (spi)>, <type of mask / traffic class (ipv6) and mask>, []] Test if the command is AT+CGTFT=? (list of supported

service (tos) (ipv4) and

<flow label (ipv6)> +CGTFT: <PDP_type>,

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 105 of 272

Description supported

Command

Possible Responses identifier>s), (list of supported <evaluation precedence index>s), (list of supported <source address and supported <protocol number (ipv4) / next of supported <packet filter

subnet mask>s), (list of

header (ipv6)>s), (list <destination port range>s), (list of supported <source supported <ipsec

port range>s), (list of security parameter

index (spi)>s), (list of supported <type of mask / traffic class service (tos) (ipv4) and (ipv6) and mask>s), label (ipv6)>s)

(list of supported <flow [<CR><LF>+CGTFT: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <packet of supported <evaluation filter identifier>s), (list

precedence index>s), (list of supported <source address and supported <protocol number (ipv4) / next of supported header (ipv6)>s), (list <destination port range>s), (list of supported <source supported <ipsec

subnet mask>s), (list of

port range>s), (list of security parameter

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 106 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Responses index (spi)>s), (list of supported <type of mask / traffic class service (tos) (ipv4) and (ipv6) and mask>s), label (ipv6)>s) []]

(list of supported <flow

Description: This command allows the TE to specify a Packet Filter - PF for a Traffic Flow Template - TFT that is used in the GGSN for routing of down-link packets onto different QoS flows towards the TE. The concept is further described in the 3GPP TS 23.060. A TFT consists of from one and up to eight Packet Filters, each identified by a unique <packet filter identifier>. A Packet Filter also has an <evaluation precedence index> that is unique within all TFTs associated with all PDP contexts that are associated with the same PDP address. The set command specifies a Packet Filter that is to be added to the TFT stored in the MT and used for the context identified by the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>. The specified TFT will be stored in the GGSN only at activation or MS-initiated modification of the related context. Since this is the same parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands, the +CGTFT command is effectively an extension to these commands. The Packet Filters consist of a number of parameters, each of which may be set to a separate value. A special form of the set command, +CGTFT= <cid> causes all of the Packet Filters in the TFT for context number <cid> to become undefined. At any time there may exist only one PDP context with no associated TFT amongst all PDP contexts associated to one PDP address. At an attempt to delete a TFT, which would violate this rule, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned. Extended error responses are enabled by the +CMEE command. The read command returns the current settings for all Packet Filters for each defined context. In case no filter is defined the read command will return "OK" only. The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT supports several PDP types, the parameter value ranges for each PDP type are returned on a separate line. TFTs shall be used for PDP-type IP and PPP only. For PDP-type PPP a TFT is applicable only when IP traffic is carried over PPP. If PPP carries header-compressed IP packets, then a TFT cannot be used. Defined values: <cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see the +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands). PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 107 of 272

The following parameters are defined in 3GPP TS 23.060 <packet filter identifier>: Numeric parameter, value range from 1 to 8. <source address and subnet mask>: Consists of dot-separated numeric (0-255) parameters on the form 'a1.a2.a3.a4.m1.m2.m3.m4', for IPv4 and 'a1.a2.a3.a4.a5.a6.a7.a8.a9.a10.a11.a12.a13.a14.a15.a16. m1.m2.m3.m4.m5.m6.m7.m8.m9.m10.m11.m12.m13.m14.m15.m1 6', for IPv6. <protocol number (ipv4) / next header (ipv6)>: Numeric parameter, value range from 0 to 255. <destination port range>: String consisting of dot-separated numeric (0-65535) parameters on the form 'f.t'. <source port range>:String consisting of dot-separated numeric (065535) parameters on the form 'f.t'. <ipsec security parameter index (spi)>: Hexadecimal parameter, value range from 00000000 to FFFFFFFF. <type of service (tos) (ipv4) and mask / traffic class (ipv6) and mask>: Dot-separated numeric (0-255) parameters on the form 't.m'. <flow label (ipv6)>: Hexadecimal parameter, value range from 00000 to FFFFF. Valid for IPv6 only. <evaluation precedence index>: Numeric parameter, value range from 0 to 255. Some of the above listed attributes may coexist in a Packet Filter while others mutually exclude each other, the possible combinations are shown in 3GPP TS 23.060. 8.17 AT*ENAP USB Ethernet Interface Control

Description Control the USB Ethernet state

Syntax AT*ENAP=<state>,<i ndex>

Possible responses OK ERROR +CME ERROR: <err>

connection Read the current setting Test AT*ENAP?

*ENAP: <status>

command to show if the supported command is

AT*ENAP=?

<state>s),(range of valid <index>es) OK

*ENAP: (range of valid

+CME ERROR: <err>

Description: PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 108 of 272

This command is used to enable or disable the USB Ethernet Emulation communication interface, and to associate a particular PDP Context with the interface. A PDP context is referenced which must have been previously defined via the *EIAC command or the +CGDCONT command. Also, an internet account must have been previously created and defined via the *EIAC command. Additional Information: A response of OK does not mean that a connection has been established or disconnected. This simply means that the command has been processed without any errors. To check the status of the connection, use the check connection status command. (AT*ENAP?) When executing the command to create a USB Ethernet connection, the response will be ERROR if a connection already exists. When executing the command to disconnect a USB Ethernet connection, the response will be ERROR if no connection exists. Defined values:
<state> 0 1 Description Disconnect Connect

<index> Integer type 1-99

Description Equivalent to <index> in *EIAC command and also <cid> in +CGDCONT

<status> 0 1 2

Description Not connected Connected Connection setup in progress

8.18

AT*EUPLINK

Send Uplink Data

Description Do Some Function

Syntax ATxxx=<parm1>[,<parm2>[,<parm3>]]

Possible

responses List of xxx: *xxx: <parm1>, <parm2>,

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 109 of 272

Description

Syntax

Possible responses <parm3> [:] +CME ERROR: <err>

Read the current setting Test

Not applicable

command the is

ATxxx=?

Range of

to show if command supported

parameters: *xxx: (0255) OK +CME ERROR: <err>

Description: This command is used to... Additional Information: Here is some additional information... Defined values:
<parm1> 0 1....25 5 Description XXX XXX Default value

<parm2> Hex string

Description xxx

<parm3> 0 1 2 3

Description xxx xxx xxx xxx

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 110 of 272

Internet Accounts
9.1 AT*EIAAUR - Internet Account Configuration, Read Authentication Parameters

Description Read the current authentication parameter settings

Syntax AT*EIAAUR=[<inde x>,<bearer_type>]

Possible responses List of existing IA(s) *EIAAUR: <index>, <bearer_type>, ,<auth_prot>, <ask4pwd> [:] authentication params

<userid>,<password>,

Read the current setting Test

Not applicable

command to show if the supported command is

AT*EIAAUR=?

*EIAAUR: (0-255),(0-4)

Range of parameters:

Description: This command reads the authentication parameters of one (or all) existing Internet Account(s). Defined values:
<index> 0 1....255 Description Read Authentication parameters of ALL existing Internet Accounts. Default value Write parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified. For range and more details on <index>, see under command AT*EIAC

Note: When <bearer_type>=0 it is necessary that <index>=0 and vice versa.


<bearer_type> 0 1....4 Description All bearers. Default value Specific bearer. For more information on bearer types see <bearer_type> pararemer definitions under command AT*EIAC

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 111 of 272

<bearer_type> <password> String type

Description Description Password for access to the IP network. Max 30 8-bit characters.

<auth_prot> Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4

Description None PAP CHAP MS-CHAP MSCHAPv2

The authentication method is organised as 5 bit long field in which each bit indicates a specific authentication method. The bitmask set, represents the Authentication methods supported by the Internet Account in question (<index>, <bearer>). Default value = 00111 Note: By None it is meant that it doesn't matter what authentication method is supported by the peer 9.2 AT*EIAAUW - Internet Account Configuration, Write Authentication Parameters

Description Define authentication parameters Read the current setting Test command to show if the supported command is

Syntax AT*EIAAUW=<index>,<bea rer_type>[,[<userid>][,[<pa ssword>][,[<auth_prot>][,[ <ask4pwd>]]]]] Not applicable

Possible responses

AT*EIAAUW=?

Range of Authentication parameters: 255),(1(00001*EIAAUW: (14),(""),(""), 11111),(0-1)

Description: This command specifies the authentication parameters of one (or all) existing Internet Account(s). PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 112 of 272

Authentication parameters are used under any PPP negotiation as well as under PS network connection establishment (context activation). Note! If the user do not specify both the parameters <Index> and <bearer_type>, the command results in an error response. Defined values:
<index> 1....255 Description Write of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified. For range and more details on <index>, see under command AT*EIAC

<bearer_type> 1 2

Description PS bearer i.e. PS connection over UMTS/GPRS network. network CS bearer, NTCSD connection over UMTS/GSM

<user_id> String type

Description characters. Password for access to the IP network. Max 30 8-bit

<auth_prot> Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4

Description None PAP CHAP MS-CHAP MS-CHAPv2

The authentication method is organised as 5 bit long field in which each bit indicates a specific authentication method. The bitmask set, represents the Authentication methods supported by the Internet Account in question (<index>, <bearer>). Default value = 00111As an example, 00111, i.e. bit2,bit1 and bit0 is set to 1. Indicating the support for CHAP, PAP and None. By None is meant that it doesn't matter what authentication method is supported by the peer. The value 0 (all the bits set to 0) is not allowed. At least one bit has to be set to 1 Note: Leading 0's does not need to be stated. E.g. 111 is the same as 00111. PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 113 of 272

9.3

AT*EIAC - Internet Account, Create

Description Create account/define general parameters Read the current setting

Syntax AT*EIAC=<bearer_type> [,[<name>]]

Possible responses *EIAC: > <index>,<name

AT*EIAC?

List of created IA's: *EIAC: <index>, <bearer_type>, <name> :

Test command to show if the command is supported

AT*EIAC=?

Range of general parameters: *EIAC: (1-4),("")

Description: This command is used to define the general parameters of an Internet Account (IA). When a new account is defined it is assigned an index which is subsequently returned as an informational text response together with bearer type and name of account. When using the IA configuration command, one can not force the value of the index. The other Internet Account commands can not be used to create an account. The other AT commands have to indicate the index value of an existing Account in combination with what kind of bearer the parameters are set for. The exception is the Internet Account configuration commands where it is implicit what the bearer type is (e.g. AT*EIAPSW - write PS bearer parameters), then only index value is necessary. Note! When a PDP Context is defined via an AT command, an Internet Account is automatically created with Packet Domain Service as the bearer and it get's an index value with a one-to-one mapping to the specified <cid> parameter value of the GPRS command. If the IA with that mapping to CId value is already existing, the specific parameters of that IA is overwritten (also when IA parameters are originally specified for another bearer than PS). In the same way a PDP Context with the default values set is defined when an IA is created with Packet Domain Service as the bearer, using the AT*EIAC command. The <cid> of the PDP context will have a one-to-one mapping with the PS bearer IA's index. Note! If user does not specify any bearer type, the command results in an error response. Note! If user does not specify a name of the account, an autogenerated name will be added to the account. Note! The temporary or locked type of accounts are reserved for internal PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 114 of 272

applications use and not listed in the read command, nor possible to create using this command. Defined values:
<bearer_type> 1 2 Description PS Bearer, i.e. PS connection over UMTS/GPRS network. network CS Bearer, i.e. NTCSD connection over UMTS/GSM

<name> String type

Description Used mostly by MMI application of phone. Max 20 characters Each Internet Account has a friendly name.

<index> 1....255

Description Index of an account within the specific bearer type. There might be several accounts that has the same index value, but only one account within a given bearer type. So it is the combination of bearer type and index Account. that forms the unique reference to one specific Internet

9.4

AT*EIACSR - Internet Account Configuration, Read CSD Bearer Capabilities

Description Read CSD parameters of

Syntax AT*EIACSR=[<index >]

Possible responses List of IA's with CSD parameters: <dialout_nbr>, <dial_type>, <data_rate>, [:]

Internet Account

*EIACS: <index>,

<data_compr> Read the current setting Test command to show if the command is AT*EIACSR=? Range of parameters: *EIACSR: (0-255) Not applicable

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 115 of 272

Description supported

Syntax

Possible responses

Description: This command is used to read the CS bearer parameters of one (or all) CS bearer Internet Account(s). Defined values:
<index> 0 Description Read CSD bearer parameters of ALL CSD bearer Internet Accounts. If no CS bearer IA's exists, only OK is submitted. Default value 1....255 Read CSD bearer parameters of the specified Internet Account. For range and more details on <index>, see under *EIAC command.

<dialout_nbr> String type

Description to call ISP phone number for internal dial out application

<dial_type> 0 1

Description Analogue modem. ISDN modem. Default value

<data_rate> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Description 9600 kbps, GSM: 1 time slot * 9600 14400 kbps, GSM: 1 time slot * 14400 19200 kbps, GSM: 2 time slots * 9600 28800 kbps, GSM: 2 time slots * 14400 (or 3 TS*9600) Default value 38400 kbps, GSM: 4 time slots * 9600 Not supported 43200 kbps, GSM: 3 time slots * 14400 57600 kbps, GSM: 4 time slots * 14400

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 116 of 272

<data_compr> 0 1

Description V42bis data compression off. V42bis data compression on. Default value Using default V42 bis parameters for dictionary size. Negotiates compression in both directions, Rx and Tx.

9.5

AT*EIACSW - Internet Account Configuration, Write CSD Bearer Capabilities

Description Define CSD of Internet Account current setting Test command the is to show if command supported Read the parameters

Syntax AT*EIACSW=<index>[,[<dialo a_rate>][,[<data_compr>]]]]] Not applicable ut_nbr>][,[<dial_type>][,[<dat

Possible responses ...

AT*EIACSW=?

Range of CS parameters: *EIACSW: (11-7),(0-1)

255),(""),(0,1),(

Description: This command is used to define the CS bearer parameters of one (or all) CS bearer Internet Account(s). Note! CS bearer IA's can only be used for internal applications only, to dial out to an ISP providing IP network access (e.g. for WAP over CS). Normal CS "modem style" dial-up networking and plain CS modem connections are done by TE issuing the "legacy" AT commands as specified by . The parameters for such calls (RLP parameters, V42bis parameters, HSCSD parameters, etc.) are only stored in volatile memory, if not stored by using &W command. Note! If the user do not specify the parameters <Index>, the command results in an error response. Defined values:
<index> 1....2 55 Description Write CSD bearer parameters of the specified Internet Account.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 117 of 272

<index>

Description For range and more details on <index>, see under *EIAC command.

<dialout_nbr> String type

Description ISP phone number for internal dial out application to call

<dial_type> 0 1

Description Analogue modem. ISDN modem. Default value

<data_rate> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Description 9600 kbps, GSM: 1 time slot * 9600 14400 kbps, GSM: 1 time slot * 14400 19200 kbps, GSM: 2 time slots * 9600 28800 kbps, GSM: 2 time slots * 14400 (or 3 TS*9600) Default value 38400 kbps, GSM: 4 time slots * 9600 supported 43200 kbps, GSM: 3 time slots * 14400 57600 kbps, GSM: 4 time slots * 14400 Not

<data_compr> 0 1

Description V42bis data compression off. V42bis data compression on. Default value Using default V42 bis parameters for dictionary size. Negotiates compression in both directions, Rx and Tx.

9.6

AT*EIAD - Internet Account Configuration, Delete

Description Delete

Syntax AT*EIAD=<index>,<bearer_type>

Possible

responses

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 118 of 272

Description account Read the current setting Test

Syntax

Possible responses

Not applicable

command the

AT*EIAD=?

Range of

to show if command is supported

parameters: *EIAD: (0255),(0-4)

Description: Action command used to delete one specific (or all) existing Internet Account(s). The other Internet Account commands (or GPRS AT commands) can not be used to delete an account. Note! If the user do not specify both the parameters <Index> and <bearer_type>, the command results in an error response. Defined values:
<index> 0 1....255 Description Delete ALL existing <bearer_type> Internet Accounts Delete Internet Account with index as specified, and bearer type as specified. command. For ranges and more details on <index> see under *EIAC

Note: When <index>=0 it is necessary that <bearer_type>=0 and vice versa.


<bearer_type> 0 1....4 Description All bearers Specific bearer. see definition of <bearer_type> under command *EIAC.

Note: When <bearer_type>=0 it is necessary that <index>=0 and vice versa. 9.7 AT*EIALCPR - Internet Account Configuration, Read PPP Parameters - LCP

Description Read LCP parameters

Syntax AT*EIALCPR=[<index>,

Possible responses List of IA's with their LCP parameters:

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 119 of 272

Description of Internet Account

Syntax <bearer_type>]

Possible responses <bearer_type>, *EIALCPR: <index>,

<accm>,<mru>,<pfc >, [:] Read the current setting Test Not applicable

>,<acfc>,<keep_alive <allowed_ncp>

command to show if the is command supported

AT*EIALCPR=?

parameters: 4)

Range of LCP

*EIALCPR: (0-255),(0-

Description: This command is used to read the PPP LCP parameters of one (or all) Internet Account(s). Defined values:
<index> 0 1....255 Description Read LCP parameters of ALL <bearer_type> Internet Accounts. with index as specified. command *EIAC Default value Read LCP parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account For range and more details on index, see under

Note: When <index>=0 it is necessary that <bearer_type>=0 and vice versa.


<bearer_type> 0 Description All bearers Used together with Index=0, reading all Internet Accounts of all bearer types. 1....255 Specific bearers. See definitions on <bearers> under command *EIAC

Note: When <bearer_type>=0 it is necessary that <index>=0 and vice versa.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 120 of 272

<accm> 0-FFFFFFFF

Description Asynchronous Control Character Map value, as a hexadecimal value. Default is: 0

<mru> 10 150

Description Max Receive Unit. The value specified is the recommended, but any MRU

between this specified value and 1500 will be accepted.

<pfc> 0

Description 00 Protocol Field Compression negotiation might not be suggested. accepted. Protocol Field Compression negotiation might not be

01

Protocol Field Compression negotiation might be suggested. accepted. Protocol Field Compression negotiation might not be

10 Protocol Field Compression negotiation might not be suggested. Protocol Field Compression negotiation might be accepted.

11

Protocol Field Compression negotiation might be suggested. Protocol Field Compression negotiation might be accepted. Default value

<acfc> 0

Description 00 Address Control Field Compression negotiation might not be suggested. be accepted. Address Control Field Compression negotiation might not

01

Address Control Field Compression negotiation might be suggested.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 121 of 272

<acfc>

Description Address Control Field Compression negotiation might not be accepted.

10

Address Control Field Compression negotiation might not be suggested. accepted. Address Control Field Compression negotiation might be

11

Address Control Field Compression negotiation might be suggested. accepted. Address Control Field Compression negotiation might be Default value

<keep_alive> 0 1

Description LCP keepalive messages should not be sent Default value LCP keepalive messages should be sent

<allowed_ncp> 0 1 2 3

Description Not supported Network Control Protocol IPCP allowed. (bit0) Default value Network Control Protocol IPv6CP allowed (bit 1) Both network control protocols allowed (bit 0, bit 1)

9.8

AT*EIALCPW - Internet Account Configuration, Write PPP Parameters - LCP

Description Define LCP parameters of Internet Account current Read the

Syntax AT*EIALCPW=<index>,<bearer_ty pe>[,[<accm>][,[<mru>][,[<pfc>][ ,[<acfc>][,[<keep_alive>][,[<allow ed_ncp>]]]]]]] Not applicable

Possible responses ...

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 122 of 272

Description setting Test command the is

Syntax

Possible responses Range of LCP parameters: *EIALCPW: 4),(0(0(1-255),(1ffffffff), 1500),(016),(0-16), (0-1),(0-3)

AT*EIALCPW=?

to show if command supported

Description: Action command used to define the PPP LCP parameters of an Internet Account (IA). This Internet Account command can not be used to create an account. Note! If the user do not specify both the parameters <Index> and <bearer_type>, the command results in an error response. Defined values:
<index> 1....255 Description Write LCP parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified. command *EIAC For range and more details on index, see under

<bearer_type> 1 2 3 4

Description PS Bearer, i.e. PS connection over UMTS/GPRS network. network CS Bearer, i.e. NTCSD connection over UMTS/GSM Bluetooth Bearer, i.e. to connect with remote Bluetooth LAN device External Interface. Test value, for "dial-in" use

<accm> 0FFFFFFFF

Description Asynchronous Control Character Map value, as a hexadecimal value. Default is: 0

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 123 of 272

<mru> 1150 0

Description Max Receive Unit. The value specified is the recommended, but any MRU between this specified value and 1500 will be accepted.

<pfc> 0

Description 00 Protocol Field Compression negotiation might not be suggested. accepted. Protocol Field Compression negotiation might not be

01

Protocol Field Compression negotiation might be suggested. accepted. Protocol Field Compression negotiation might not be

10

Protocol Field Compression negotiation might not be suggested. Protocol Field Compression negotiation might be accepted.

11

Protocol Field Compression negotiation might be suggested. Protocol Field Compression negotiation might be accepted. Default value

<acfc> 0

Description 00 Address Control Field Compression negotiation might not be suggested. be accepted. Address Control Field Compression negotiation might not

01

Address Control Field Compression negotiation might be suggested. Address Control Field Compression negotiation might not be accepted.

10

Address Control Field Compression negotiation might not be suggested.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 124 of 272

<acfc>

Description Address Control Field Compression negotiation might be accepted.

11

Address Control Field Compression negotiation might be suggested. accepted. Address Control Field Compression negotiation might be Default value

<keep_alive> 0 1

Description LCP keepalive messages should not be sent Default value LCP keepalive messages should be sent

<allowed_ncp> 0 1 2 3

Description Not supported Network Control Protocol IPCP allowed. (bit0) Default value Network Control Protocol IPv6CP allowed (bit 1) Both network control protocols allowed (bit 0, bit 1)

9.9

AT*EIALSR - Internet Account Configuration, Read Link Socket Parameters

Description Read linksocket parameters

Syntax AT*EIALSR=[<index>,<bearer _type>]

Possible responses List of existing IA(s) link*EIALSR: socket params <index>,

<bearer_type>, <link_socket> [:] Read the current setting Test command to show if Not applicable

AT*EIALSR=?

Range of parameters: *EIALSR: (1-

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 125 of 272

Description the is command supported

Syntax

Possible responses 255),(1-4),(01)

Description: Action command that reads the status of the link socket parameter of one (or all) existing Internet Account(s). Defined values:
<index> 0 1....255 Description Read status of the <link_ socket> parameter of ALL <bearer_type> Internet Accounts. Read general parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified. command *EIAC For range and more details on <index> see under

<bearer_type> 1 2

Description PS Bearer, i.e. PS connection over UMTS/GPRS network. network CS Bearer, i.e. NTCSD connection over UMTS/GSM

<link_socket> 0 1

Description Disable link socket. Enable link socket. Default value

9.10

AT*EIALSW - Internet Account Configuration, Write Link Socket Parameters

Description Enable/disable link socket. Read the Test command to

Syntax AT*EIALSW=<index>,<bearer_t ype>[,[<link_socket>]] Not applicable AT*EIALSW=?

Possible ...

responses

current setting

Range of parameters:

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 126 of 272

Description show if the command is supported

Syntax

Possible responses *EIALSW: (1-255),(14),(0-1)

Description: Action command that enables or disables the link socket. Note! If the user do not specify both the parameters <Index> and <bearer_type>, the command results in an error response. Defined values:
<index> 1....255 Description Write general parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified. command *EIAC For range and more details on <index> see under

<bearer_type> 1 2

Description PS Bearer, i.e. PS connection over UMTS/GPRS network. CS Bearer, i.e. NTCSD connection over UMTS/GSM network

<link_socket> 0 1

Description Disable link socket. Enable link socket. Default value

9.11

AT*EIAIPCPR - Internet Account Configuration, Read PPP Parameters - IPCP

Description Read IPCP parameters of Internet Account

Syntax AT*EIAIPCPR=[<index>,< bearer_type>]

Possible responses List of IA's with PPP IPCP parameters: *EIAIPCPR: <index>,

<bearer_type>,

<own_IP_addr>,

<prim_DNS_addr>, <sec_dns_addr>, <header_compr>

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 127 of 272

Description Read the current setting Test command the is to show if command supported

Syntax Not applicable

Possible responses [:]

AT*EIAIPCPR=?

Range of parameters: 255),(0-4) *EIAIPCPR: (0-

Description: This command reads out the IPCP parameters of one (or all) Internet Accounts Defined values:
<index> 0 1....255 Description Read IPCP parameters of ALL <bearer_type> Internet Accounts. Default value Read IPCP parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified. command *EIAC For range and more details on <index> see under

Note: When <index>=0 it is necessary that <bearer_type>=0 and vice versa.


<bearer_type> 0 Description All bearers. Accounts of all bearer types. 1....4 Default value Used together with Index=0, reading all Internet

Note: When <index>=0 it is necessary that <bearer_type>=0 and vice versa.


<ip_addr> String of format "a.b.c.d" Description IPv4 host address ME's own IP address. Default set to 0.0.0.0, which means request for dynamic IP address to be allocated by network upon connection.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 128 of 272

<prim_dns_addr> String of format "a.b.c.d"

Description IPv4 primary DNS server address Default set to 0.0.0.0.0, which means request for dynamic IP address to be allocated by network upon connection.

<sec_dns_addr> String of format "a.b.c.d"

Description IPv4 secondary DNS server address Default set to 0.0.0.0, which means

request for dynamic IP address to be

allocated by network upon connection.

<header_compr> 0?

Description Header compression off header compression? Default value Or various protocol numbers for different types of

1?

Header compression on

9.12

AT*EIAIPCPW - Internet Account Configuration, Write PPP Parameters - IPCP

Description Define IPCP parameters of Internet Account current setting Test Read the

Syntax AT*EIAIPCPW=<index>,<bearer_ty pe>[,[< ip_addr>][,[<prim_dns_addr>][,[< sec_dns_addr>][,[<header_compr >]]]]] Not applicable

Possible ...

responses

command the is

AT*EIAIPCPW=?

Range of PPP IPCP parameters: *EIAIPCPW: 4),(""),(""), (""),(0-1) (1-255)(1-

to show if command supported

Description: PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 129 of 272

Action command that specifies the PPP IPCP parameters of one (or all) Internet Accounts. The command is used to specify the IP addresses to be used, both under PPP negotiations as well as under PS network connection establishment (context activation). If "0" values are given necessary parameters are requested to be genereated dynamically by the network one attaches to. If specific values are set, it means requesting for static IP addresses to be used. Note! Values stored here are not the ones used when doing PS dial-up connection from external application (TE), since TE in this case has it's own IP addresses to negotiate with the network (what TE sends is forwarded by ME's PPP proxy to network). Note! If the user do not specify both the parameters <Index> and <bearer_type>, the command results in an error response. Note! PPP parameters are relevant for all bearer types, but mostly for internal calls. Defined values:
<index> 1....255 Description Write IPCP parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified. command *EIAC For range and more details on <index> see under

Note: When <index>=0 it is necessary that <bearer_type>=0 and vice versa.


<bearer_type> 1 2 Description PS Bearer, i.e. PS connection over UMTS/GPRS network. network CS Bearer, i.e. NTCSD connection over UMTS/GSM

Note: When <index>=0 it is necessary that <bearer_type>=0 and vice versa.


<ip_addr> String of format "a.b.c.d" Description IPv4 host address ME's own IP address. Default set to 0.0.0.0, which means request for dynamic IP address to be allocated by network upon connection.

<prim_dns_addr> String of format "a.b.c.d"

Description IPv4 primary DNS server address Default set to 0.0.0.0.0, which means

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 130 of 272

<prim_dns_addr>

Description request for dynamic IP address to be allocated by network upon connection.

<sec_dns_addr> String of format "a.b.c.d"

Description IPv4 secondary DNS server address Default set to 0.0.0.0, which means request for dynamic IP address to be

allocated by network upon connection.

<header_compr> 0?

Description Header compression off header compression? Default value Or various protocol numbers for different types of

1?

Header compression on

9.13

AT*EIAPSW - Internet Account Configuration, Write PS Bearer Parameters

Description Write PSD parameters of Internet Account current setting Test Read the

Syntax AT*EIAPSW=<index>[,[<pref_serv >][,[<apn>] [,[<traffic_class>][,[<header_comp r>][,[<data_compr>]]]]]] Not applicable

Possible ...

responses

command to show if the is command supported

AT*EIAPSW=?

Range of PS *EIAPSW:

parameters: (1-255),(0(0-1),(0-1)

1),(""),(0-4),

Description: Action command used to specify PS specific parameters of one (or all) PS bearer Internet Account. This command is used to define the most relevant Packet Switched (PS) data connection parameters. Note that all PS parameters of this command PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 131 of 272

except <pref_serv> can also be configured using the normal R'99 GPRS commands, see [7] (plus a lot more PS parameters). Note! For PS bearers, the <index> maps to the <ContextId> used in the GPRS commands. Note! If the user do not specify the parameter <Index>, the command results in an error response. Defined values:
<index> 1....255 Description Write packet switched bearer parameters of Internet Account with index as specified. command *EIAC For range and more details on <index> see under

<pref_serv> 0

Description Preferred service - Packet Switched only Means that an incoming call will be denied when resources to serve both. running PS connection(s), if there are not system

Preferred service - Automatic Default value Means that an incoming call will put GPRS or UMTS packet switched connection(s) on hold if there are not system resources to serve both.

<apn> String type

Description APN

<traffic_class> 0 1

Description Conversational. Gives best effort For e.g. Voice over IP and other QoS (delay) critical applications Interactive Streaming

For e.g. Video/Audio over IP and other QoS (delay+data volume) critical applications. Background

requirements and low-medium data volume. 4 Subscribed value Default value For non-time critical applications

For e.g. Chat and applications with some time

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 132 of 272

<header_compr> 0 1

Description Header compression off. Header compression on. Default value

RFC 1144 (Van Jacobson) or RFC 2507 depending on UMTS or GSM network.

<data_compr> 0 1

Description Data compression off. Data compression on. Default value

Negotiates compression in both directions, Rx and Tx.

Using default V42 bis parameters for dictionary size.

9.14

AT*EIAPSR - Internet Account Configuration, Read PS Bearer Parameters

Description Read PS parameters of Internet Account

Syntax AT*EIAPSR=[<index>]

Possible responses parameters: List of IA's with PS

*EIAPSR: <index>, <traffic_class>, <data_compr> [:]

<pref_serv>,<apn>, <header_compr>,

Read the

current setting Test command to show if the command is supported

Not applicable AT*EIAPSR=? Range of PS parameters: *EIAPSR: (0-255)

Description: Action command that reads the wanted Packet Switched (PS) parameters from one (or all) primary PS bearer Internet Account(s). Defined values:
<index> 0 Description Read packet switched bearer parameters of ALL existing PS bearer Internet Accounts.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 133 of 272

<index>

Description If no PS bearer IA's exists, only OK is submitted. Default value

1....255

Read packet switched bearer parameters of Internet Account with Index as specified. command *EIAC For range and more details on <index> see under

<pref_serv> 0

Description Preferred service - Packet Switched only Means that an incoming call will be denied when resources to serve both.

running PS connection(s), if there are not system 1 Preferred service - Automatic Default value

Means that an incoming call will put GPRS or UMTS system resources to serve both.

packet switched connection(s) on hold if there are not

<apn> String type

Description APN

<traffic_class> 0 1

Description Conversational. Gives best effort For e.g. Voice over IP and other QoS (delay) critical applications Interactive Streaming

For e.g. Video/Audio over IP and other QoS (delay+data volume) critical applications. Background

requirements and low-medium data volume. 4 Subscribed value Default value For non-time critical applications

For e.g. Chat and applications with some time

<header_compr> 0

Description Header compression off. Default value

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 134 of 272

<header_compr> 1

Description Header compression on. RFC 1144 (Van Jacobson) or RFC 2507 depending on UMTS or GSM network.

<data_compr> 0 1

Description Data compression off. Data compression on. Default value

Using default V42 bis parameters for dictionary and Tx.

size. Negotiates compression in both directions, Rx

9.15

AT*EIAR - Internet Account Configuration, Read General Parameters

Description Read the current authentication parameter settings

Syntax AT*EIAR=[<index>][,[<bea rer_type>]]

Possible responses List of existing IA(s) authentication params *EIAR:

<index>, <name> [:]

<bearer_type>,

Read the current setting Test

Not applicable

command to show if the supported command is

AT*EIAR=?

Range of general parameters: *EIAR: (0255),(0-4)

Description: This command reads out the general parameters of one or several Internet Accounts. Note: When <index>=0 it is necessary that <bearer_type>=0 and vice versa. Defined values:

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 135 of 272

<index> 0 1....255

Description Read general parameters of ALL existing <bearer_type> Internet Accounts. Account with given index. Default value Read general parameters of <bearer_type> Internet

<bearer_type> 0

Description All bearers Used together with Index=0, reading all Internet Accounts of all bearer types. Default value

1....4

Specific bearer. See definitions on <bearer_type> under command *EIAC

<name> String type

Description Each Internet Account has a friendly name. Used mostly by MMI application of phone. Max 20 characters

9.16

AT*EIAW - Internet Account Configuration, Write General Parameters

Description Define authentication parameters Read the current setting Test

Syntax AT*EIAW=<index>,<bearer_type >[,[<name>]] Not applicable

Possible ...

responses

command to show if the supported command is

AT*EIAW=?

parameter s: *EIAW: (1255),(14),("")

Range of

Description: Action comamnd that specifies the general parameters of the Internet Account. Note! If the user do not specify both the parameters <Index> and <bearer_type>, the command results in an error response. PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 136 of 272

Defined values:
<index> 1....255 Description Write general parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified.

<bearer_type> 1 2

Description PS Bearer, i.e. PS connection over UMTS/GPRS network. CS Bearer, i.e. NTCSD connection over UMTS/GSM network

<name> String type

Description Each Internet Account has a friendly name. characters Used mostly by MMI application of phone. Max 20

9.17

AT*EIARUTR - Internet Account Configuration, Read Routing Table Parameters

Description Read Routing table parameters of Internet Account

Syntax AT*EIARUTR= [<index>,<bear er_type>]

Possible responses List of IA's with their Routing table parameters: <bearer_type>, <IP-version>, <prefix>, *EIARUTR: <index>,

<destination_address>,<next hop_address> [:]

Read the current setting Test

Not applicable

command the is

AT*EIARUTR=?

Range of Routing table parameters: *EIARUTR:

to show if command supported

(1-255),(0-4),(""),

(0-32/0-128),(""),("")

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 137 of 272

Description: This command reads the Routing table parameters of one Internet Account. Defined values:
<index> 0 1....255 Description Read Routing table parameters of ALL <bearer_type> Internet Accounts. Default value Read Routing table parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified.

<bearer_type> 0

Description All bearers Used together with Index=0, reading all Internet Accounts of all bearer types.

1....4

Specific bearer. See bearer definitions under the *EIAC command

Note: When <bearer_type>=0 it is necessary that <index>=0 and vice versa.


<prefix> (0....3 2) Description IPv4: many bits that should be set to 1 in the mask. 0 indicates default route. 255.255.255.0. Value used to create a IPv4 subnet mask. Indicates how

A value of 24 will result in the following subnet mask:

<IP_version> String format "IP"

Description Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)

<destination_address> String of format "a.b.c.d"

Description IPv4 address of the destination host. An entry with a value of 0.0.0.0 is considered as a default route.

<nexthop_address> String of format "a1.a2.a3.a4"

Description IPv4 address of the adjacent host or router to which the packet should be sent next.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 138 of 272

<nexthop_address>

Description Not utilized for point-to-point connections

9.18

AT*EIARUTW - Internet Account Configuration, Write Routing Table Parameters

Description Set

Syntax AT*EIARUTW=

Possible responses ...

Routing table parameters of Internet Account current setting Test Read the

<index>,<bearer_type>,<IPdress>,<nexthop_address>

version>,<prefix>,<destination_ad

Not applicable

command the is

AT*EIARUTW=?

Range of Routing table

to show if command supported

parameters: *EIARUTW: (1-255),(14),(""),(0-1), (0-32 / 0128),(""),("")

Description: This command specifies one row of parameters in the Routing table of one Internet Account. All parameters <IPversion>,<prefix>,<destination_address>,<nexthop_address> must be given regardless if only one parameter is to be set. Note! For IPv6 addresses, the notation :: can be used, but only once. e.g. Dest addr. FFFF:FFFF:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 can be written like FFFF:FFFF::1 Note! If the user do not specify all parameters, the command results in an error response Defined values:
<index> 1....255 Description Write Routing table parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 139 of 272

<bearer_type> 1 2

Description PS Bearer, i.e. PS connection over UMTS/GPRS network. CS Bearer, i.e. NTCSD connection over UMTS/GSM network

Note: When <bearer_type>=0 it is necessary that <index>=0 and vice versa.


<prefix> (0....32) Description IPv4: Value used to create a IPv4 subnet mask. Indicates

0 indicates default route. mask: 255.255.255.0.

how many bits that should be set to 1 in the mask.

A value of 24 will result in the following subnet

<IP_version> String format "IP"

Description Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)

<destination_address> String of format "a.b.c.d"

Description IPv4 address of the destination host. An entry with a value of 0.0.0.0 is considered as a default route.

<nexthop_address> String of format "a1.a2.a3.a4"

Description IPv4 address of the adjacent host or router to which the packet should be sent next. Not utilized for point-to-point connections

9.19

AT*EIARUTD - Internet Account Configuration, Delete Routing Table Parameters

Description Delete table

Syntax AT*EIARUTD=

Possible responses ...

Routing parameters

<index>,<bearer_type>[,<IP-

version>,<prefix>,<destination_a

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 140 of 272

Description of Internet Account Read the current setting Test

Syntax ddress>,<nexthop_address>] Not applicable

Possible responses

command the is

AT*EIARUTD=?

Range of Routing table

to show if command supported

parameters: *EIARUTW: (1-255),(1(0-32 / 0-

4),(""),(0-1), 128),(""),("")

Description: This command deletes the Routing table parameters of one Internet Account. All parameters <IPversion>,<prefix>,<destination_address>,<nexthop_address> must be given to delete one row in the specified routing table. Note! For IPv6 addresses, the notation :: can be used, but only once. e.g. Dest addr. FFFF:FFFF:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 can be written like FFFF:FFFF::1 Note! If the user specify <index> and <bearer_type> parameters only, all defined IPv4 and IPv6 routes will be removed. Note! If the user do not specify both the parameters <Index> and <bearer_type>, the command results in an error response. Defined values:
<index> 1....255 Description Delete parameters of <bearer_type> Internet Account with index as specified.

<bearer_type> 1 2

Description PS Bearer, i.e. PS connection over UMTS/GPRS network. network CS Bearer, i.e. NTCSD connection over UMTS/GSM

Note: When <bearer_type>=0 it is necessary that <index>=0 and vice versa.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 141 of 272

<prefix> (0....32)

Description IPv4: Value used to create a IPv4 subnet mask. Indicates 0 indicates default route. 255.255.255.0. how many bits that should be set to 1 in the mask. A value of 24 will result in the following subnet mask:

<IP_version> String format "IP"

Description Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)

<destination_address> String of format "a.b.c.d"

Description IPv4 address of the destination host. An entry with a value of 0.0.0.0 is considered as a default route.

<nexthop_address> String of format "a1.a2.a3.a4"

Description IPv4 address of the adjacent host or router to which the packet should be sent next. Not utilized for point-to-point connections

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 142 of 272

10

Identification
10.1 AT Attention Command

Description Checks the communication between the MS and application

Command AT

Possible Responses OK +CME ERROR <err>

Description: This command is used to determine the presence of an MS. If the MS supports AT commands, it returns an OK final result code. 10.2 AT+CGMI Read MS Manufacturer Identification

Description Request manufacturer identification

Command AT+CGMI

Possible Responses <manufacturer> +CME ERROR: <err>

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGMI=?

OK ERROR

Description: Causes the MS to return one or more lines of information text <manufacturer>. Defined values:
<manufacturer> Sony Ericsson Description This companys name is displayed.

Example: AT+CGMI Sony Ericsson OK 10.3 AT+CGMM Read MS Model Identification

Description Request the model identification

Command AT+CGMM

Possible Responses <model> +CME ERROR:

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 143 of 272

Description Test if the command is supported

Command AT+CGMM=?

Possible Responses <err> OK ERROR

Description: Causes the MS to return one or more lines of information text <model>, determined by the MS manufacturer. Defined values:
<model> String type Description Model name for the transceiver unit

Example: AT+CGMM PC300 OK 10.4 AT+CGMR Read Revision Identification

Description Request revision identification string Test if the command is supported

Command AT+CGMR

Possible Responses <revision> +CME ERROR: <err>

AT+CGMR=?

OK ERROR

Description: This command causes the module to return a string containing information about the software revision. Also implemented as AT+GMR. Defined values:
<revision> String type Description An ASCII string containing the software revision

Example: AT+CGMR R1A017 OK 10.5 AT+CGSN Read Product Serial Number Identification

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 144 of 272

Description Request product serial number Test if the command is supported

Command AT+CGSN

Possible Responses <sn> +CME ERROR: <err>

AT+CGSN =?

OK ERROR

Description: This command causes the module to return the IMEI (International Mobile station Equipment Identity), which identifies the individual ME. Example: AT+CGSN 004601013266310 OK 10.6 AT+GCAP Capabilities

Description Request complete capability list

Syntax AT+GCA P

Possible responses +GCAP: +CGSM, +DS OK

Description: This command returns the modules capabilities. Defined values:


Capabilities +CGSM +DS Description Support for GSM commands Support for V.42bis compression

Example: AT+GCAP +GCAP: +CGSM, +DS OK 10.7 AT+GMI Request Manufacturer Identification

Description Read manufacturers name

Syntax AT+GMI

Possible responses <manufacturer> OK

Description: This command returns the name of the manufacturer. Equivalent to +CGMI Defined values: PC300 AT Command Manual Page 145 of 272 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Parameters <manufacturer> Sony Ericsson

Description The name of the manufacturer.

Example: AT+GMI Sony Ericsson OK 10.8 AT+GMM Request Model Identification

Description Read the model identification

Syntax AT+GMM

Possible responses <model> OK

Description: This command returns the identification of the specific module model. Equivalent to +CGMM Defined values:
Parameter <model> String type Model name for the transceiver unit Description

Example: AT+GMM PC300 OK 10.9 AT+GMR Revision Identification

Description Read software revision identification.

Syntax AT+GMR

Possible responses <revision> OK

Description: This command returns the software revision. Equivalent to +CGMR Defined values:
Parameters <revision> String 6 characters Description

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 146 of 272

Example: AT+GMR R1A001 OK 10.10 ATI Identification Information

Description Read identification information Test if the command is supported and which optional information types

Command ATI[<value>] ATI=?

Possible

Responses <information> I: (0,1,3,5,7,9)

Description: This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of text, followed by a final result code. As an option, <value> can be used to select from among multiple types of identifying information as shown in the table below. Defined values:
<value> 0 1 3 5 7 9 Description Model identification. Equivalent to +GMM Software revision. Equivalent to +GMR Modem manufacturer name Listing of active settings Modem Configuration Profile, i.e. brief listing of the modem functionality: Bluetooth, IrDA, modem type etc. PnP (Plug n Play) identification

Examples: ATI0 PC300 OK ATI1 R1A001 OK ATI3 Sony Ericsson OK ATI=5 Configuration Settings on Channel 1 &C: 1 &D: 2 PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 147 of 272

*EIAC: 1,1,"PS Account 1" *ELIN: 1 +CBST: 0,0,1 +CDIP: 0,0 +CGACT: 1,0 +CGATT: 1 +CGDCONT: 1,"IP","isp.internet","0.0.0.0",0,0 +CGEQMIN: 1,3,0,0,0,0,0,0,"0E0","0E0",2,0,0 +CGEQREQ: 1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"1E4","1E5",0,0,0 +CGEREP: 0,0 +CGQMIN: 1,0,0,0,0,0 +CGQREQ: 1,0,0,3,0,0 +CHSN: 0,1,0,4 +CHSR: 0 +CHSU: 0 +CMEE: 1 +CMUX: 0,0,1,31,10,3,30,10,2 +CR: 0 +CRC: 0 +CRLP: 61,61,48,6,0 +CRLP: 120,120,48,6,2,3 +CSCS: "GSM" +CV120: 1,1,1,0,0,0 +CVHU: 0 +DR: 0 +DS: 3,0,1024,32 +ICF: 3,3 +IFC: 2,2 +ILRR: 0 +IPR: 115200 E: 1 M: 0 Q: 0 S0: 000 S10: 002 S2: 128 S3: 013 S4: 010 S5: 008 S6: 002 S7: 050 S8: 002 V: 1 X: 4 OK ATI7 PC Card Configuration Profile Product Type Type II PC Card Interfaces USB Options RLP, V42bis PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 148 of 272

OK ATI9 (0136SE101D\\MODEM\\PC30091) OK

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 149 of 272

11

Serial Interface
11.1 AT&C Circuit 109 (DCD) Control

Description Set behavior of carrier detect Show the current setting Test if the command is supported

Command AT&C[<value>] AT&C? AT&C=?

Possible Responses OK ERROR &C: <value> OK &C: (list of supported <value>s) OK

Description: Determines how ITU-T V.24 circuit 109 (Data Carrier Detect) relates to the detection of a received line signal from the remote end. Defined values:
<value> 0 1 Description DCD always on DCD follows the connection. Default value

Note: If in online command mode, while running a TCP/IP session through AT Commands, DCD will only be updated when returning to online data mode using ATO. 11.2 AT&D Circuit 108 (DTR) Response

Description Control actions from DTE Show the current setting Test if the command is supported

Command AT&D[=][<value>] AT&D? AT&D=?

Possible Responses OK ERROR &D: <value> OK &D: (list of supported <value>s) OK

Description: Controls all actions initiated by data terminal ready from DTE. This command controls the behavior of online data state when the PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 150 of 272

Data Terminal Ready (DTR - circuit 108.2) line is deasserted by the DTE. Defined values:
<value> 0 1 2 Description Ignore. line command mode. When in on-line data mode, deassert DTR switches to onWhen in on-line data mode, deassert DTR closes the current

connection and switch to off-line command mode. (Default value)

11.3

ATV

DCE Response Format

Description Set DCE response format Show the current setting Test if the command is supported

Command ATV[=]<value> ATV? ATV=?

Possible Responses OK ERROR V: <value> V: (list of supported <value>s)

Description: Select either descriptive or numeric response codes. The ATV command sets the verbose numeric response codes and strips off the <S3><S4> additions to the command response. Additional Information: It shall be noted that in the case where a final result code is pending, this will delay any unsolicited result codes to not be returned until after the final result code has been sent. Defined values:
<value> 0 1 Description Display numeric result codes Display verbose result codes. Default value

List of result codes


ATV1/ATV=1 OK CONNECT ATV0/ATV=0 0 1 Description Acknowledges execution of a command Final A connection has been established; the DCE is moving from command state to online data state

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 151 of 272

ATV1/ATV=1 RING

ATV0/ATV=0 2

Description Intermediate The DCE has detected an incoming call signal from the network Unsolicited

NO CARRIER

The connection has been terminated or the attempt to establish a connection failed

Intermediate ERROR 4 Command not recognized, command line maximum length exceeded, problem with processing the command line NO 6 7 None parameter value invalid, or other

Final DIALTONE BUSY CONNECT <TEXT> No dial tone detected Final Engaged (busy) signal detected Final Same as CONNECT, but includes manufacturer-specific text that may specify DTE speed, line speed, error control, data compression, or other status Intermediate

11.4

AT+ICF DTE-DCE Character Framing Format

Description Defines DTEDCE character framing current setting Read the

Command AT+ICF=[format [,parity]] AT+ICF?

Possible Responses OK ERROR +ICF: <format>[,<parity>] OK ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+ICF=?

+ICF: (list of supported <format>s), (list of supported <parity>s)

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 152 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Responses OK ERROR

Description: This extended-format compound parameter is used to determine the local serial port start-stop (asynchronous) character framing used by the DCE to accept DTE commands, and while transmitting information text and result code, if this is not automatically determined; AT+IPR=0 forces AT+ICF=0 (see AT+IPR). Additional Information: Only applicable to RS-232. This command is provided for compatibility only and has no effect on PC Card functionality over USB. Defined values:
<format> 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description 8 Data 2 Stop 8 Data 1 Parity 1 Stop 8 Data 1 Stop. (Default value) 7 Data 2 Stop 7 Data 1 Parity 1 Stop 7 Data 1 Stop

<parity> 0 1 2 3

Description Odd Even Mark Space (Default value)

11.5

AT+IFC DTE-DCE Local Flow Control

Description Defines DTEcontrol DCE local flow Show the current setting Test if the command is

Command AT+IFC=[<by_te>, [<by_ta>]] AT+IFC? AT+IFC=?

Possible Responses OK ERROR +IFC: <by_te>,<by_ta> +IFC: (list of supported

<by_te>s,<by_ta>s)

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 153 of 272

Description supported

Command

Possible Responses

Description: Defines the flow control between the modem and the computer when in on-line data mode. No flow control is enabled when in any of the command modes. Defined values:
<by_te> 0 1 2 3 Description No flow control on DTE are removed by the DCE interface Xon/Xoff flow control from DTE to DCE. Control characters

RTS flow control from DTE. (Default value) are passed to the remote DCE/DTE. Xon/Xoff flow control from DTE to DCE. Contorl characters

<by_ta> 0 1 2

Description No flow control on DCE Xon/Xoff flow control from DCE to DTE CTS flow control from DCE. Default value

11.6

AT+IPR Cable Interface Port baud rate

Description Defines fixed DTE rate Show the current setting

Command AT+IPR=[rate] AT+IPR?

Possible Responses OK ERROR +IPR:<rate> OK ERROR

Test if the

command is supported

AT+IPR=?

autodetectable <rate>s), (list of fixed-only <rate>s)] OK ERROR

+IPR: (List of supported

Description: Specifies the data rate at which the DCE will accept commands, in addition to 1200 bits/s or 9600 bits/s (as required in v25ter, subclause 4.3).

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 154 of 272

Additional Information: Only applicable to RS-232. This command is provided for compatibility only and has no effect on PC Card functionality over USB. Defined values:
<rate> Discrete integer value Description The <rate> value specified shall be the rate in bits per second at which the DTE-DCE interface should operate, e.g. 19200 or 115200. The rates specific. supported by a particular DCE are manufacturer The following rates, are supported; 0 = autobaud. Default value. 0 300 600 1200 2400 3600 4800 7200 9600 14400 19200 28800 38400 57600 115200 230400 460800 300 bps 600 bps 1200 bps 2400 bps 3600 bps 4800 bps 7200 bps 9600 bps 14400 bps 19200 bps 28800 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps 230400 bps 460800 bps

11.7

ATE

Command Echo

Description Request Command Echo Show the current

Command ATE[<value>] ATE?

Possible Responses OK ERROR <value>

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 155 of 272

Description setting Test if the command is supported

Command ATE=?

Possible Responses E: (list of supported <value>s)

Description: The setting of this parameter determines whether or not the DCE echoes characters received from the DTE during command state and online command state. Defined values:
<value> 0 1 Description DCE does not echo characters during command state and online command state DCE echoes characters during command state and online

command state. Default value

11.8

ATQ

Result Code Suppression

Description Set Result Code Suppression Read the current setting Test if the command is supported

Command ATQ<value> ATQ? ATQ=?

Possible Responses OK ERROR Q: <value> <value>s) Q: (list of supported

Description: This command determines whether the DCE transmits result codes to the DTE. When result codes are being suppressed, no portion of any intermediate, final, or unsolicited result code - header, result text, line terminator, or trailer - is transmitted.
Defined values: <value> 0 1 Description DCE transmits result codes. Default value Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 156 of 272

12

Network
12.1 AT*E2EMM Engineering Monitoring Mode

Description Set operation during GSM Idle mode

Command AT*E2EMM= <n>[,<m>]

Possible Responses *E2EMM GSM Idle Serving Cell MCC, MNC, LAC, CellId, BSIC, Ch, RxL, C1, C2 <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic >,<ch>,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2> Neighbor Cells MCC, MNC, LAC, CellId, BSIC, Ch, RxL, C1, C2 <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic >,<ch>,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2> <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic >,<ch>,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2> OK ERROR CME ERROR

Set

operation during GSM Dedicated mode

AT*E2EMM= <n>[,<m>]

*E2EMM GSM Dedicated Serving Cell MCC, MNC, LAC, CellId, BSIC, TA, TN Ch, RxL, RxLF, RxLS, RxQF, RxQS, <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic >,<ch>,<rxlfull>,<rxlsub>,<rxqf ull>,<rxqsub>,<ta>,<tn> Neighbor Cells MCC, MNC, LAC, CellId, BSIC, Ch, RxL, C1, C2

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 157 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Responses <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic >,<ch>,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2> <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic >,<ch>,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2> OK ERROR CME ERROR

Set operation during WCDMA mode

AT*E2EMM= <n>[,<m>]

*E2EMM WCDMA - Serving Cell <RRCState> MCC, MNC, LAC, Ch, SC, RSCP, EcN0, RSSI, ServL, ServQ, Hs, Rs <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ch>,<sc> ,<rscp>,<EcNo>,<rssi><ServLvl >,<ServQual>,<Hs>,<Rs>

Monitored Intra-Frequency Cells Ch, SC, PTxPwr, ULTxPwr, ServL, ServQ, Hn, Rn <ch>,<sc>,<PtxPwr>,<ULTxPwr Rn> <ch>,<sc>,<PtxPwr>,<ULTxPwr Rn> >,<ServLvl>,<ServQual>,<Hn>,< >,<ServLvl>,<ServQual>,<Hn>,<

Monitored Inter-Frequency Cells Ch, SC, PTxPwr, ULTxPwr, ServL, ServQ, Hn, Rn <ch>,<sc>,<PtxPwr>,<ULTxPwr >,<ServLvl>,<ServQual>,<Hn>,< Rn> <ch>,<sc>,<PtxPwr>,<ULTxPwr >,<ServLvl>,<ServQual>,<Hn>,<

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 158 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Responses Rn> Monitored Inter-RAT Cells Ch, BSIC, CIO, RSSI, RxLevMin <ch>,<bsic>,<cio>,<rssi>,<rxle vmin> <ch>,<bsic>,<cio>,<rssi>,<rxle vmin>

Detected Cells Ch, SC, PTxPwr, ULTxPwr, ServL, ServQ, Hn, Rn <ch>,<sc>,<PtxPwr>,<ULTxPwr Rn> <ch>,<sc>,<PtxPwr>,<ULTxPwr Rn> OK ERROR CME ERROR Read Test if the command is supported AT*E2EMM? AT*E2EMM=? Not Supported *E2EMM: (list of supported <n>s),(list of supported <m>s) ERROR >,<ServLvl>,<ServQual>,<Hn>,< >,<ServLvl>,<ServQual>,<Hn>,<

Description: There is only one presentation format mode (Display)) and one response type (one shot response). The purpose of the Display presentation format mode is to display the data in a readable form, including headers and line breaks (<CR><LF>). The response types give the user the choice of one-shot information or an unsolicited response with <m> seconds between each response. Responses occur when the module is camped on a network. Note: The periodic unsolicited response is not supported in this version of *E2EMM PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 159 of 272

Examples: AT*E2EMM=9 *E2EMM WCDMA - Serving Cell ( Idle ) MCC, MNC, LAC, Ch, SC, RSCP, EcNo, RSSI, ServL, ServQ, Hs, Rs 310, 410, 32c5, 9766, 267, -33, - 3, 0, 1, 11, , Monitored Intra-Frequency Cells Ch, SC, PTxPwr, ULTxPwr, ServL, ServQ, Hn, Rn 9766, 275, 4, 24, 1, 11, , Monitored Inter-Frequency Cells Ch, SC, PTxPwr, ULTxPwr, ServL, ServQ, Hn, Rn Monitored Inter-RAT Cells Ch, BSIC, CIO, RSSI, RxLevMin 674, 3, 0, 255, 0 673, 29, 0, 255, 0 670, b, 0, 255, 0 681, 32, 0, 255, 0 677, 2, 0, 255, 0 676, 7, 0, 255, 0 684, 23, 0, 255, 0 683, 16, 0, 255, 0 Detected Cells Ch, SC, PTxPwr, ULTxPwr, ServL, ServQ, Hn, Rn OK Defined values:
<n> 9 Description with headers and <CR><LF> line separators Presentation of the network location information. Display mode

<m> 0255

Description Integer type giving time (in seconds) between unsolicited responses. <m>=0 means immediately send out ONE response only. Default and only supported value: 0

<RRCState> String type

Description Idle, Dedicated

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 160 of 272

<mcc> Integer type

Description Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Code identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU

<mnc> Integer type

Description Two digits in decimal format. The Mobile Network Code identifies the PLMN operator in the serving cell

<lac> Integer type

Description Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format

<ci> Integer type

Description Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format

<bsic> Integer type

Description One byte Base Stations Identification code in hexadecimal format

<ch> (0-1023)

Description It represents the ARFCN that shows the Absolute RF Channel, which identifies the BCCH carrier

<rxl> Integer type -110 to -40

Description Received Signal Strength level in dBm measured on idle mode.

<rxlfull> Integer type -110 to -40

Description Received Signal Strength level in dBm. The Rx Level is taken in non-DTX mode during a SACCH multiframe

<rxlsub> Integer type

Description Received Signal Strength level in dBm. The Rx

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 161 of 272

<rxlsub> -110 to -40

Description Level is taken from the DownLink signal in DTX mode and the average is applied to subset of SACCH frames

<rxqfull> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Description Received Signal Quality (non-DTX mode) BER < 0.2% BER < 0.4% BER < 0.8% BER < 1.6% BER < 3.2% BER < 6.4% BER < 12.8%

<rxqsub> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Description Received Signal Quality (DTX mode) BER < 0.2% BER < 0.4% BER < 0.8% BER < 1.6% BER < 3.2% BER < 6.4% BER < 12.8%

<c1> Integer

Description calculates this parameter, in idle mode, to decide if the cell is suitable to camp on. After the calculation the criterion is C1 > 0. See GSM 05.08 Path Loss criterion parameter for neighbour cells. The MS

<c2> Integer

Description Cell reselection parameter for neighbour cells. This parameter shall optimise the selected cell reselection

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 162 of 272

<ta> 063

Description According to GSM 04.18 V8.6.0, the coding of the timing advance value is the binary representation of the timing integer representation of the timing advance in binary format advance in bit periods; 1 bit period = 48/13uS. <ta> is the

64-

255

Reserved

<tn> 0-7

Description Its value indicates the time slot number in a traffic channel

<rscp> -120 to -25

Description Receive Signal Code Power

<EcNo> 0 to 49

Description Carrier to Noise Ratio

<ServLvl> 1 to 11

Description Cell selection/reselection quality measure of serving cell

<ServQual> -110 to -40

Description Cell selection quality of the serving cell

<Hs> 0x00 - 0xFFFF

Description Quality level threshold criterion H of serving cell

<Rs> 0x00 - 0xFFFF

Description Cell ranking criterion R of serving cell

<Hn> 0x00 - 0xFFFF

Description Quality level threshold criterion H of the

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 163 of 272

<Hn>

Description strongest neighbor cell

<Rn> 0x00 - 0xFF

Description Cell ranking criterion R of the strongest neighbor cell

<ULTxPwr> -110 to -40

Description Max allowed uplink Tx power

<PtxPwr> 10 to 50

Description Primary CPICH Tx Power

<cio> -128 to 127

Description Cell Individual Offset

<rssi> 0 to 255

Description Received Signal Strength Indication

12.2

AT*ERINFO

Network Capability

Description Active the response mode

Command AT*ERINFO=<m ode>

Possible Responses OK +CME ERROR: <err> *ERINFO:

Query the current radio access information Test if the command is supported Unsolicited

AT*ERINFO?

<mode>,<gsm_rinfo>,<umts _rinfo> +CME ERROR: <err>

AT*ERINFO=?

*ERINFO: (list of supported <mode>s) +CME ERROR <err> *ERINFO:

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 164 of 272

Description report if *ERINFO reports are enabled

Command

Possible Responses <gsm_rinfo>,<umts_info>

Description: This command is used to provide an unsolicited result code indicating the current technology of the current cell, or to query the current cell information. Defined values:
<mode> 0 1 Description Disable unsolicited information. Default value. Enable unsolicited information

<gsm_rinfo> 0 1 2

Description No GPRS or EGPRS available GPRS service is available EGPRS service is available

<umts_rinfo> 0 1 2

Description No UMTS or HSDPA service available UMTS service available HSDPA service availalbe

Examples: AT*ERINFO=0 OK AT*ERINFO? *ERINFO: 0,2,2 OK 12.3 AT+CLCK Facility Lock

Description Request facility

Command AT+CLCK=<fac>, <mode>[,<passwd>

Possible Responses when <mode>=2 and command successful:

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 165 of 272

Description lock

Command [,<class>]]

Possible Responses +CLCK: <status>[,<class1> [<CR><LF>+CLCK: <status>,<class2>[...]] +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

Test if the command is

AT+CLCK=?

<fac>s) OK

+CLCK: (list of supported

supported

+CME ERROR <err>

Description: The command is used to lock, unlock or interrogate an ME or a network facility <fac>. A password is normally needed to carry out such actions. When querying the status of a network service (<mode>=2), the response line for 'not active' case (<status>=0) should be returned only if service is not active for any <class>. Call barring facilities are based on GSM/UMTS supplementary services (refer to 3GPP 02.88). The interaction of these, with other commands based on other GSM/UMTS supplementary services, is described in the GSM/UMTS standard. Additional information: Note: "PS" and <mode>=1 correspond to Auto Lock Defined values:
<fac> PS SC "CS" AO OI AI IR OX AB AG Description PH-SIM (lock PHone to SIM card) (ME asks password when other than current SIM card inserted) when this lock command issued) CNTRL (lock control surface) BAOC (bar all outgoing calls) BOIC (bar outgoing international calls) BAIC (bar all incoming calls) BIC-Roam (bar incoming calls when roaming outside the home country) country) BOIC-exHC (bar outgoing international calls except to home SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-up and

All barring services All out going barring services

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 166 of 272

<fac> AC FD PN PU PP PC

Description All in coming barring services SIM fixed dialing feature. PIN2 is required as a password Network personalization Network subset personalization Service provider personalization Corporate personalization

<mode> 0 1 2 10

Description Unlock Lock Query status Full lock (only valid for <fac>=PS, after power on always ask for ME_lock_code)

<status> 0 1 2

Description Not active Active Not available

<passw> string type

Description Is the same as password specified for the facility from the ME user interface or with change password command, +CPWD

<classx> 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128

Description Voice L1 Data Fax (Not supported) Short message service Data circuit sync Data circuit async Dedicated packet access Dedicated PAD Access

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 167 of 272

12.4

AT+CNUM

Subscriber Number

Description Request number subscriber

Command AT+CNUM

Possible Responses [<alpha1>],<number1>,<type1> <LF> +CNUM:

[,<speed>,<service>[,<itc>]][<CR> +CNUM:

[<alpha2>],<number2>,<type2> +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR Test if the command is AT+CNUM=? +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

[,<speed>,<service> [,<itc>]][]]

supported

Description: This command returns the MSISDNs related to the subscriber (this information can be stored in the SIM or in the ME). If subscriber has different MSISDN for different services, each MSISDN is returned in a separate line. Additional information: The implementation of this command is made according to Bluetooth HFP 1.5, which deviates somewhat from the 3GPP, and the parameters <alpha> and <itc> are not supported but included to show the full command as specified in 3GPP TS 27.005. Defined values:
<alphax> Alphanumeric string Description Associated with <numberx>; Not supported

<numberx> String type

Description Phone number of format specified by <typex>

<typex> Integer type

Description Type of address, (refer to 3GPP 24.008)

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 168 of 272

<speed> data rate

Description Always displays 8. +CNUM is a standard command (27.007). This field makes no sense for voice numbers speed the user (SIM) has subscribed to. and fax numbers, and the module has no knowledge what

<service> 0 4 5

Description Asynchronous modem Voice Fax

<itc> 0 1

Description 3.1kHz UDI

Not supported

The typex field is defined in 3GPP 24.008 as an integer which combines the Number Type parameter and the Numbering Plan parameter. The parameters may be extracted as follows: Subtract 128 from the displayed value Divide the result by 16. The quotient is the Number Type parameter. The remainder is the Numbering Plan parameter. For example, given a displayed typex value of 161: 161 - 128 = 33 33 / 16 = 2 with a remainder of 1 Therefore Number Type = 2, Numbering Plan = 1 The definitions are given in the next two tables.
Number Type 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description Unknown International number National number Network specific number Dedicated address, short code Reserved Reserved Reserved for extension

Numbering Plan 0

Description unknown

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 169 of 272

Numbering Plan 1 2 3 4 5-7 8 9 10 11 12-14 15

Description ISDN/telephony numbering plan (Rec. E.164/E.163) reserved data numbering plan (Recommendation X.121) telex numbering plan (Recommendation F.69) reserved national numbering plan private numbering plan reserved reserved for CTS (see 3GPP TS 44.056) reserved reserved for extension

12.5

AT+COPN

Read Operator Names

Description Request operator selection

Command AT+COPN

Possible Responses <numeric1>,<alpha1> [<CR><LF> +COPN: <numeric2>,<alpha2> [...]] +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR +COPN:

Test if the command is supported

AT+COPN=?

OK

Description: Command returns the list of operator names from the ME. Each operator code <numericn> that has an alphanumeric equivalent <alphan> in the ME memory shall be returned. This command can return several hundred names and can execute for up to 90 seconds.. Defined values: <numericn>: string type; operator in numeric format. (See AT+COPS) <alphan>: string type; operator in long alphanumeric format. (See AT+COPS) PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 170 of 272

12.6

AT+COPS

Operator Selection

Description Request operator

Command AT+COPS=[<mode> [,<format> [,<oper>[,<AcT>]]]] AT+COPS?

Possible Responses +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR <mode>[,<format>, <oper>,<AcT>] OK ERROR +CME ERROR <err> +COPS:

selection Show the current setting

Test if the

command is supported; Perform search operator

AT+COPS=?

supported (<stat>,long alphanumeric <oper>, short alphanumeric <oper>,numeric <oper>,<AcT>)s] +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

+COPS: [list of

Description: The set command performs operator selection. <mode>=0 or 1 forces an attempt to select and register the GSM/UMTS network operator. The value of <mode> determines whether the selection is done automatically by the ME or is forced to operator <oper>, specified in format <format>. If the selected operator is not available, no other operator will be selected (except for <mode>=4). The selected operator name format applies to futher read commands (+COPS?). The read part of the command returns the current mode and current operator. If there is no current operator, only the mode is returned. The test part of this command returns a list of quintuplets, each representing an operator present in the network. Quintuplet consists of an integer indicating the availability of the operator <stat>, long and short alphanumeric format of the name of the operator, numeric format representation of the operator, and the access technology <AcT>. Any of the formats may be unavailable and should then be an empty field. The list of operators shall be in PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 171 of 272

order: home network, networks referenced in the SIM/UICC, and other networks. Defined values:
<mode> 0 1 3 Description Automatic (<oper> field is ignored). Default value. optional) Manual (<oper> field shall be present and <AcT> is

Set only <format> (for read command +COPS?), do not fields are ignored); this value is not applicable in read command response

attempt registration/de-registration (<oper> and <AcT>

manual selection fails, automatic mode (<mode>=0) is entered

Manual/automatic (<oper> field shall be present); if

Note: When using <mode> = 1, only <format> = 2 is allowed.


<format> 0 1 2 Description long format alphanumeric <oper>. Default value. short format alphanumeric <oper> code consisting of the 3-digit MCC and 2 or 3-digit MNC. Numeric <oper>. A text string representation of the PLMN

<oper> string type

Description Format determined by the <format> setting. Default is empty string.

<stat> 0 1 2 3

Description Unknown Available Current Forbidden

<AcT> 0 2

Description GSM Access Technology UTRAN Access Technology

Example: AT+COPS=? +COPS: (2,UK VODAFONE,,23415,0) PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 172 of 272

+COPS: (3,UK Orange PCS Ltd,,23433,0) +COPS: (3,T-Mobile UK,,23430,0) +COPS: (3,O2 - UK,,23410,0) OK An invalid home network, eg. no SIM inserted, will display as null string as follows: AT+COPS=? +COPS: (0,,,,0) +COPS: (2,UK VODAFONE,,23415,0) OK 12.7 AT+CPOL Preferred Operator List

Description Request operator selection

Command AT+CPOL=[< index>][, <format>[,< oper>[,GSM_ AcT,<GSM_C ompact_AcT cT>]]]

Possible Responses +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

>,<UTRAN_A Shows the current setting AT+CPOL? +CPOL:

<index1>,<format>,<oper1>[,< 1>,<UTRAN_AcT1>] [<CR><LF>+CPOL:

GSM_AcT1>,<GSM_Compact_AcT

<index2>,<format>,<oper2>[,< 2>,<UTRAN_AcT2>] [...]] Test if the command is supported AT+CPOL=?

GSM_AcT2>,<GSM_Compact_AcT

+CME ERROR: <err> +CPOL: (list of supported <index>s),(list of supported <format>s) OK ERROR +CME ERROR: <err>

Description: This command is used to edit the PLMN selector with Access Technology lists in the SIM card or active application in the UICC(GSM or USIM). PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 173 of 272

Execute command writes an entry in the SIM/USIM list of preferred PLMNs, which could previously have been selected by the command +CPLS, however, as this command is not supported, the User controlled PLMN selector with Access Technology, EFPLMNwAcT, is the one accessed by default. If <index> is given but <oper> is left out, entry is deleted. If <oper> is given but <index> is left out, <oper> is put in the next free location. If only <format> is given, the format of the <oper> in the read command is changed. The Access Technology selection parameters, <GSM_AcT>, <GSM_Compact_AcT> and <UTRAN_AcT>, are required when writing User controlled PLMN selector with Access Technology, EF EFPLMNwAcT, If <index> is given but <oper> is left out, entry is deleted. If <oper> is given but <index> is left out, <oper> is put in the next free location. If only <format> is given, the format of the <oper> in the read command is changed Note: ME may also update this list automatically when new networks are selected. Note: AcT parameters are optional for the set command, but if one of the parameters is issued then all should be issued.If the parameters are not issued at all or only indicated by commas then the respective default values 1,0,1 are used. Read command returns all used entries from the SIM list of preferred operators. Test command returns the whole index range supported by the SIM. Note: While the +CPLS command is not supported, this +CPOL command will behave as though +CPLS is set to value 0. Thus, per TS27.007, this behavior is "User controlled PLMN selector with Access Technology EFPLMNwAcT, if not found in the SIM/UICC then PLMN preferred list EFPLMNsel (this file is only available in SIM card or GSM application selected in UICC)" Defined values:
<index> Integer type Description The order number of operator in the SIM preferred operator list (value range returned by test command)

<format> 0 1 2

Description long format alphanumeric <oper> short format alphanumeric <oper> numeric <oper> Default value

<oper> string type

Description Format determined by the <format> setting

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 174 of 272

<GSM_AcT> 0 1

Description Access technology not selected Access technology selected

<GSM_Compact_AcT> 0 1

Description Access technology not selected Access technology selected

<UTRAN_AcT> 0 1

Description Access technology not selected Access technology selected

12.8

AT+CREG

Network Registration

Description Request network

Command AT+CREG=[<n>]

Possible Responses +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

registration Show the current setting AT+CREG?

+CREG: <n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

Test if the

command is supported

AT+CREG=?

<n>s) OK

+CREG: (list of supported

+CME ERROR <err> ERROR

Description: Set command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CREG: <stat> when <n>=1 and there is a change in the ME network registration status, or code +CREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] when <n>=2 and there is a change of the network cell. Read command returns the status of result code presentation and an integer <stat>, which shows whether the network has currently indicated the registration of the ME. Location information PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 175 of 272

elements <lac> and <ci> are returned only when <n>=2 and ME is registered in the network. Controls the presentation of the unsolicited result code +CREG. Defined values:
<n> 0 1 2 Description Disable network registration unsolicited result code. Default value <stat> Enable network registration unsolicited result code +CREG: Enable network registration and location information

unsolicited result code +CREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]

<stat> 0 1 2 3 4 5

Description operator to register with Not registered, ME is not currently searching for a new

Registered, home network operator to register with Registration denied Unknown Registered, roaming Not registered, but ME is currently searching for a new

<lac> string type

Description two byte location area code in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00C3" equals 195 in decimal)

<ci> string type

Description Four byte cell ID in hexadecimal format. Four bytes are required for UMTS, whereas only two bytes are applicable for GSM, and the two first bytes are then zeros e.g. 00001A02

Example: AT+CREG? +CREG: 0,1 OK 12.8.1 +CREG - Network Registration Unsolicted Response Page 176 of 272

+CREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 177 of 272

13

Phonebook
13.1 AT+CPBR Phonebook Read Notes: * - SIM is required for SIM based phonebooks.
Description Read phone book entries Command AT+CPBR=<index1> [,<index2>] Possible Responses +CPBR:<index1>,<numb er>, <type>,<text>[[,<text_da tetime>]<CR><LF> +CPBR: pe>, ]

<index2>,<number>,<ty <text>[,<text_datetime>] +CME ERROR <err> OK Test if the command is AT+CPBR=? ERROR <index>s),<nlength>,<tl ength> OK +CME ERROR <err> ERROR +CPBR: (list of supported

supported

Description: Returns phonebook entries in location number range <index1>... <index2> from the current phonebook memory storage selected with +CPBS. If <index2> is left out, only location <index1> is returned. Entry fields returned are location number <indexn>, phone number stored there <number> (of format <type>) and text <text> associated with the number. When the Received Calls List, the Missed Calls List or the Dialed Calls List is selected, the two additional fields <text_date> and <text_time> containing date and time will be returned. In this case the <text> field containing text associated with the number has to be extracted from one of the phonebooks (SIM, ME or TA). If listing fails in ME, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. Defined values:
<indexn> integer type Description Values in the range of location numbers of phone book memory

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 178 of 272

<number> string type

Description Phone number of format <type>

<type> Integer type 129

Description Type of address octet, refer 3GPP 24.008 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international unknown Default if no "+" in <number>

145

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number Default if "+" in <number>

161 128 - 255

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number Other values refer to 3GPP 24.008

<text> string type

Description Field of maximum length <tlength>; command, +CSCS. character set as specified by the Select TE Character Set

<nlength> integer type

Description Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>

<tlength> integer type

Description Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>

<text_datetime> string

Description Date and time in the format: yy/mm/dd,hh:mm

Example: AT+CPBR=1,99 +CPBR: 1,44123456789,145,Test Number +CPBR: 2,440987654321,145,Test number 2 +CPBR: 3,449876543210,129,Test Number 3 PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 179 of 272

OK 13.2 AT+CPBS Phonebook Storage Select Notes: * - SIM is required for SIM based phonebooks.
Description Set phone book storage Read the current setting Command AT+CPBS=<storage> [,<password>] AT+CPBS? Possible Responses +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR +CPBS: <storage>,<used>,<total> +CME ERROR <err> OK AT+CPBS=? ERROR Test if the command is <storage>s) OK +CPBS: (list of supported

supported

+CME ERROR <err> ERROR

Description: Selects phonebook memory storage <storage>, which is used by other phonebook commands. Read command returns currently selected memory, number of used locations and total number of locations in the memory. Defined values:
<storage> FD Description or if a UICC with an active GSM application is present, the information in EFFDN under DFTelecom is selected. If a UICC in EFFDN under ADFUSIM is selected. EN SM "LD" DC RC MC "ON" Emergency numbers (read only) SIM phone book. Default value. SIM/USIM last number dialed list. Not Supported ME dialled calls list (read only) Not Supported ME received calls list (read only) Not Supported ME missed calls list (read only) Not Supported SIM (or ME) own numbers (MSISDNs) list (reading of this storage may be available through +CNUM also). When storing information in the SIM/UICC, if a SIM card is present or if a UICC with an active GSM application is with an active USIM application is present, the information SIM/USIM fix-dialing-phonebook. If a SIM card is present

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 180 of 272

<storage>

Description present, the information in EFMSISDN under DFTelecom is selected. If a UICC with an active USIM application is present, the information in EFMSISDN under ADFUSIM is

selected.

<passwd> String type

Description Represents the password required when selecting storage FD password protected <storage>s, for example PIN2 for

<used> Integer type

Description Number of locations used in the selected memory (<storage>)

<total> Integer type

Description Total number of locations in the selected memory (<storage>)

13.3

AT+CPBW Phonebook Write Notes: * - SIM is required for SIM based phonebooks.
Description Request write phone book Command AT+CPBW=<index> [, <number>[,<type> [,<text>]]] AT+CPBW=? Possible Responses +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR +CPBW: (list of supported <index>s),<nlength> ,(list of supported <type>s),<tlength> +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

Test if the command is supported

Description: Writes phonebook entry in location number <index> in the current phonebook memory storage area, selected with AT+CPBS. If the <number> and <text> parameters are omitted, the entry is deleted. If <index> is omitted but <number> is included, the entry is written to the first free location in the phonebook. If writing fails in ME, PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 181 of 272

+CME ERROR: <err> is returned. Test command returns location range supported by the current storage as a compound value, the maximum length of <number> field, supported number formats of the storage, and the maximum length of <text> field. If ME is not currently reachable, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. If storage does not offer format information, the format list is empty parenthesis. Defined values:
<index> integer type Description Values in the range of location numbers of phone book memory

<number> string type

Description Phone number of format <type>

<type> integer format 129

Description Type of address octet, default 145 when dialing string otherwise 129. (refer to 3GPP 24.008) unknown Default if no "+" in <number>. includes international access code character +,

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international

145 128-255

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number Default if "+" in <number>. Other values refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7

<text> string type

Description Field of maximum length <tlength>; command, +CSCS character set as specified by the select TE character set See description at end of this section

<nlength> integer type

Description Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 182 of 272

<tlength> integer type

Description Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>

Notes: When using +CPBW to add entries to SIM/USIM phonebook, it is likely that not all entries will be accepted for numbers longer than 20 digits. There is a dependency on the size of the extension file EFext1. If the space allocated to the extension file is used up, then new phonebook write attempts of numbers with more than 20 digits will not be accepted. Entries stored in memories DC, RC, and MC, will not be deleted using +CPBW.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 183 of 272

14

Short Message Services - Point to Point


14.1 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages

Description Set service or service preference Read the command

Command AT+CGSMS=[<service>]

Possible Responses OK ERROR

AT+CGSMS?

<service> OK ERROR

+CGSMS:

Test if the command is supported

AT+CGSMS=?

+CGSMS: (list of available OK ERROR <service>s)

Description: The set command is used to specify the service or service preference that the MT will use to send MO SMS messages. The read command returns the currently selected service or service preference. Defined values:
<service> 0 1 2 3 Description GPRS/Packet Domain Circuit switched GPRS/packet domain not available) GPRS/packet domain preferred (use circuit switched if

Circuit switched preferred (use GPRS/packet domain if circuit switched not available). Default value.

14.2

AT+CMGF Message Format Common for both PDU and Text Modes
Description Set message format Show the current AT+CMGF? Command AT+CMGF=<mode> Possible Responses OK ERROR +CMGF: <mode>

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 184 of 272

Description setting

Command

Possible Responses OK ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CMGF=?

+CMGF: (list of supported OK ERROR <mode>s)

Description: This command tells the TA, which input and output format to use for messages. The <mode> parameter indicates the format of messages used with send, list, read and write commands, and unsolicited result codes resulting from received messages. Mode can be either PDU mode (entire TP data units used) or text mode (headers and body of the messages given as separate parameters). Test command returns supported modes as a compound value. Defined values:
<mode> 0 1 Description PDU mode. Default value Text mode. Not Supported.

14.3

AT+CMGW PDU Mode


Description Write message to memory

Write Message to Memory

Command AT+CMGW=<length> [,<stat>]<CR> <pdu><ctrl-Z/ESC>

Possible Responses +CMGW: <index> +CMS ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Test if the

command is supported

AT+CMGW=?

OK ERROR

Description: Stores a message to memory storage <mem2>. Memory location <index> of the stored message is returned. By default message status will be set to stored unsent, but parameter <stat> allows other status values to be given. Entering PDU is the same as specified by the send message command, +CMGS. If writing fails, PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 185 of 272

final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. See AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage. This command is abortable. This command is abortable by sending <ESC> character (IRA 27) This character must be be sent before the terminating <ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) is sent in order to have any effect. Defined values:
<stat> 2 Description Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)

<index> Integer type

Description Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory

<length> Integer type

Description Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)

<pdu> Unquoted string

Description In the case of SMS: 3GPP 24.011 SC address followed by 3GPP 23.040 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with

integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)) format In the case of CBS: 3GPP 23.041 TPDU in hexadecimal

14.4 AT+CMGC PDU Mode


Description Send command message Command

Send Command

Possible Responses if PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and +CMGC:

AT+CMGC=<length><CR> <pdu><ctrl-Z/ESC>

sending successful: <mr>[,<ackpdu>] if sending fails: +CMS ERROR:

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 186 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Responses <err> OK ERROR

Test if the command is

AT+CMGC=?

OK ERROR

supported

Description: Sends a command message from a TE to the network (SMSCOMMAND). The entering of PDU is as specified in the send message command, +CMGS. Message reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery. Optionally (when +CSMS <service> value is 1 and network supports) <ackpdu> is returned. Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This command is abortable. Defined values:
<length> Integer type Description Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)

<pdu> Unquoted String

Description In the case of SMS: 3GPP 24.011 SC address followed by 3GPP 23.040 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with

integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)) format In the case of CBS: 3GPP 23.041 TPDU in hexadecimal

<mr> Integer type

Description 3GPP 23.040 TP-Message-Reference in integer format

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 187 of 272

<ackpdu> String

Description GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU; format is same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without GSM by double quote characters like a normal string type parameter Not supported 04.11 SC address field and parameter shall be bounded

14.5

AT+CMGS PDU Mode


Description Send message

Send Message

Command AT+CMGS=<length> <CR><pdu><ctrlZ/ESC>

Possible Responses +CMGS: <mr>[,<ackpdu>] +CMS ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Test if the

command is supported

AT+CMGS=?

OK ERROR

Description: Sends a message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). Message reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery. Optionally, when AT+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is network support, <ackpdu> is returned. Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. <length> must indicate the number of octets coded in the TP layer data unit to be given (i.e. SMSC address octets are excluded). The TA shall send a four character sequence <CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32) after command line is terminated with <CR>; after that PDU can be given from TE to ME/TA. The PDU shall be hexadecimal format (similarly as specified for <pdu>) and given in one line; ME converts this coding into the actual octets of PDU. When the length octet of the SMSC address (given in the <pdu>) equals zero, the SMSC address set with command Service Centre Address +CSCA is used. <ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of PDU This command is abortable.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 188 of 272

Sending can be aborted by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27). This character must be sent before the terminating <ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) is sent in order to have any effect. Defined values:
<mr> Integer type Description 3GPP 23.040 TP-Message-Reference in integer format

<length> Integer type

Description Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length).

<pdu> Unquoted string

Description In the case of SMS: 3GPP 24.011 SC address followed by 3GPP 23.040 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with

integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)) format In the case of CBS: 3GPP 23.041 TPDU in hexadecimal

<ackpdu> ...

Description 3GPP 23.040 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU; GSM 04.11 SC address field and parameter shall be type parameter Not supported format is same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without bounded by double quote characters like a normal string

14.6

AT+CMSS PDU mode


Description Send from storage Command

Send From Storage

Possible +CMSS: <mr> +CMS

Responses

AT+CMSS=<index>[,<da>[,<toda>]]

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 189 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Responses ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Test if the

command is supported

AT+CMSS=?

OK ERROR

Description: Sends message with location value <index> from message storage <mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND). Reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. See AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage for definition and setting of <mem2> Note: Parameters <da> and <toda> will be accepted without error but ignored (they will not override the values stored in the message <pdu>). This command is abortable. Defined values:
<index> Integer type Description Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory

<mr> Integer type

Description GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format

14.7

AT+CMGD Delete Message Common for both PDU and Text modes
Description Delete message Command AT+CMGD=<index>[, <delflag>] Possible Responses +CMS ERROR: <err> OK ERROR Test if the command is supported AT+CMGD=? supported supported +CMGD: (list of

<index>s[,list of

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 190 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Responses <delflag>s] OK ERROR

Description: Deletes message from preferred message storage <mem1> location <index>. If <delflag> is present and not set to 0, the ME ignores <index> and acts according to the definition of <delflag> in the table shown below. If <delflag> is omitted, only the entry in <index> will be deleted. If deleting fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. Test command shows the valid memory locations. Defined values:
<index> Integer type Description Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory

<delflag> 0 1

Description Delete the message specified in <index>. Default. storage, leaving unread messages and stored mobile Delete all read messages from preferred messages

originated messages (whether sent or not) untouched. 2 and sent mobile originated messages, leaving unread messages and unsent mobile originated messages untouched. 3 Delete all read messages from preferred message storage and unsent mobile originated messages leaving unread messages untouched. 4 Delete all messages from preferred message storage Delete all read messages from preferred message storage

including unread messages.

14.8

AT+CMGL PDU Mode


Description List message Command

List Message

Possible Responses +CMGL: <index>,<stat>,[<alpha>], <length> F> <CR><LF><pdu>[<CR><L

AT+CMGL=[<stat>]

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 191 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Responses +CMGL: <index>,<stat>,[<alpha>], <length> <CR><LF><pdu>[]] +CMS ERROR: <err>

Test if the command is supported

AT+CMGL=?

+CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)

Description: Note: Returns messages with status value <stat> from preferred message storage <mem1> to the TE. Entire data units <pdu> are returned. If status of the message is received unread, status in the storage changes to received read. If listing fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. See +CPMS for definition of <mem1> Defined values:
<stat> Integer type 0 1 2 3 4 Description Indicates status of message in memory. Received unread message (i.e. new message) Received read message Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs) Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs) command) All messages (only applicable to +CMGL

Default value

<index> Integer type

Description Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory

<alpha> String type

Description Will be left empty but not omitted

<length> Integer

Description Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 192 of 272

<length> type

Description the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)

<pdu> Unquoted string

Description In the case of SMS: 3GPP 24.011 SC address followed by 3GPP 23.040 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with

integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)) format In the case of CBS: 3GPP 23.041 TPDU in hexadecimal

Example: AT+CMGF=1 +CMGL: 1,1,,91 07919107739613F2000A81000000000032007040709074348A536 176594E07B4DFE234BBEC62A7ED65D7F8DD0651CB6E777A0 E7296EF731D485A9F97C9F3751A242FD3D3F2F21C6496BFDB 207AD9ED4ECF416133BD2C0711C3F6F41C34ACC341F7B41B +CMGL: 2,1,,85 07919107739613F2000A81000000000032007040705170428A4C6 176594E07B4DFE234BBEC62A7ED65D7F8DD0651CB6E777A0 E7296EF731D4828CF87DD20FA3DED9E83E0753AA8EA9ABA 406937FD0D2286EDE93968588783E6E5767A0E OK AT+CMGL=? +CMGL: (0-4) OK 14.9 AT+CMGR PDU Mode
Description Read message Command AT+CMGR= <index>

Read Message

Possible Responses +CMGR: <stat>,[<alpha>],<length>] <CR><LF><pdu> OK ERROR +CMS ERROR: <err>

Test if the

command is supported

AT+CMGR=?

OK ERROR

Description: PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 193 of 272

Returns message with location value <index> from preferred message storage <mem1> to the TE. Status of the message and entire message data unit <pdu> is returned. If status of the message is received unread, status in the storage changes to received read. If reading fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. See +CPMS for definition of <mem1> Defined values:
<stat> Integer type 0 1 2 3 Description Indicates the status of message in memory. Received unread message (i.e. new message) Received read message Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs) Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)

<index> Integer type

Description Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory

<alpha> String type

Description Will be left empty but not omitted

<length> Integer type

Description Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)

<pdu> Unquoted string

Description In the case of SMS: 3GPP 24.011 SC address followed by 3GPP 23.040 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with

integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)) format In the case of CBS: 3GPP 23.041 TPDU in hexadecimal

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 194 of 272

14.10 AT +CMMS More Messages to Send Parameter Command Syntax


Description Set mode of SMS relay protocol link Read the current setting Test command to show if the command is supported +CMMS? +CMMS=? +CMMS: <n> supported <n>s) +CMMS: (list of Command +CMMS=[<n>] Possible response(s)

Description Set command controls the continuity of SMS relay protocol link. When feature is enabled (and supported by network) multiple messages can be sent much faster as link is kept open. Test command returns supported values as a compound value. Defined Values
<n> 0 1 Description Disable Keep enabled until the time between the response of the latest message send command (+CMGS, +CMSS, etc.) and the next link and switch <n> automatically back to 0 2 send command exceeds 1-5 seconds, then ME shall close the Enable (if the time between the response of the latest message

send command and the next send command exceeds 1-5 seconds, ME shall close the link but TA shall not switch automatically back to <n>=0)

14.11 AT+CNMI PDU Mode


Description Set new message to TE Command

New Message Indications to TE

Possible Responses +CMS ERROR: <err> OK ERROR +CNMI: <mode>,<mt>, r> <bm>,<ds>,<bf OK ERROR

AT+CNMI=[<mode> ]]]]]

indication

[,<mt>[,<bm>[,<ds>[,<bfr>

Show the current setting

AT+CNMI?

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 195 of 272

Description Show if the is command supported

Command AT+CNMI=?

Possible Responses +CNMI: (list of supported <mode>s), <mt>s), (list of supported (list of supported <bm>s), <ds>s), <bfr>s OK ERROR (list of supported (list of supported

Description: Selects the procedure for the way in which new messages received from the network, are indicated to the TE when it is active, e.g. DTR signal is ON. If the TE is inactive (DTR signal is OFF), message receiving is carried out as specified in GSM 03.38 (3G TS 23.038). If the command fails and the error is related to mobile equipment or network, the final result code CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. Defined values:
<mode> 0 1 2 Description Indication mode to buffer in TA Not supported Indication mode to discard Not supported (e.g. in online data mode) and flush to TE when the link is unreserved. Otherwise, forward them directly to the TE. Default & only supported value Indication mode to buffer in TA while TA-TE link is reserved

<mt> 0

Description No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE. Use <mem3> as preferred storage. Default value

memory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited result code: +CMTI: <mem>,<index>

SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA and the indication of the

Class 0, class 1, and class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 196 of 272

<mt>

Description to the TE using the unsolicited result code but not stored in ME/TA: +CMT:[<alpha >], <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode) Class 2 messages are handled as if <mt>=1

unsolicited result codes +CMT: <length><CR><LF><pdu>. Class 3 SMS-DELIVER is not stored in ME/TA. Messages of <mt>=1 other data coding schemes result in indication as defined in

Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to TE using

Note: See below for a table showing the indication and message destination dependency on SMS Class.
<bm> 0 Description Store message to BM (or some manufacturer specific memory). No CBM indications are routed to the TE Default value 2 New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited result code: +CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode). New CBMs are not stored in CBM memory

<ds> 0

Description REPORT is not stored in ME/TA Default value No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE. SMS-STATUS-

SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited SMS-STATUS-REPORT is not stored in ME/TA

result code: +CDS: < length>< CR>< LF>< pdu> (PDU mode).

SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited result code: +CDSI: < mem><index> (PDU mode enabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is stored in ME/TA Not supported

<bfr> 0

Description TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is flushed to the TE when <mode> 1..3 is entered (OK response shall be given before flushing the codes).

TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 197 of 272

<bfr>

Description command is cleared when <mode> 1..3 is entered Not supported

Unsolicited Result codes: +CMT: <length><CR><LF><pdu> +CMTI: <mem>,<index> +CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> +CDS: <length><CR><LF><pdu> Indication and destination of message routing vs. SMS class and <mt> setting.
SMS Destination <mt> 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 Indication none +CMTI... +CMT... +CMTI... none +CMTI... +CMT... +CMTI... none +CMTI... +CMT... +CMTI... none +CMTI... +CMTI... +CMTI... none +CMTI +CMT... +CMT... CPMS <mem3>="ME" ME ME TE ME ME ME TE ME ME ME TE ME SM SM SM SM ME ME TE TE Destination CPMS<mem3>="SM" SM SM TE SM SM SM TE SM SM SM TE SM SM SM SM SM SM SM TE TE

Class none none none none 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 198 of 272

14.11.1

+CMTI Response

New Message Indication Unsolicited

Description: An Unsolicited Response indicating that a message is received. AT+CNMI is used to control the format of the message received indication. +CMTI: <mem>,<index> Defined values:
<mem> ME SM Description ME message storage SIM message storage

<index> Integer type

Description Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory

14.11.2

+CMT

Received Message Unsolicited Response

Description: An Unsolicited Response indicating a Short Message is received and routed directly to TE. AT+CNMI is used to control the format of the message received indication. +CMT: <length><CR><LF><pdu> Defined values:
<length> integer type Description Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)

<pdu> Unquoted string

Description In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA

integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)) format In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal

character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 199 of 272

14.11.3

+CBM Response

Received Cell Broadcast Unsolicited

Description: An Unsolicited Response indicating a Cell Broadcast Message is received and routed directly to TE. AT+CNMI is used to control the format of the message received indication. +CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> Defined values:
<length> integer type Description Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)

<pdu> Unquoted string

Description In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA

integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)) format In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal

character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with

14.11.4

+CDS

SMS Status Report Unsolicited Response

Description: An Unsolicited Response indicating sent message status. +CDS: <length><CR><LF><pdu> Defined values:
<length> integer type Description Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)

<pdu> Unquoted string

Description In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with

integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 200 of 272

<pdu>

Description In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format

14.12

AT+CPMS

Preferred Message Storage

Description Set preferred message storage

Command AT+CPMS=<mem1> [,<mem2>] [,<mem3>]

Possible Responses +CPMS: <used1>,<total1>,<used 2>,<total2>,<used3>,<t otal3> OK ERROR +CMS ERROR: <err>

Show the current setting

AT+CPMS?

<mem1>,<used1>,<total 1, 2, <mem2>,<used2>,<total <mem3>,<used3>,<total 3> +CMS ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

+CPMS:

Test if the command is

AT+CPMS=?

<mem1>s),(list of

+CPMS: (list of supported

supported <mem2>s),(list of supported <mem3>s) OK ERROR

supported

Description: Selects memory storage <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> to be used for reading, writing, etc. If chosen storage is not appropriate for the ME, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. Test command returns lists of memory storage supported by the TA. Additional information: The setting made by AT+CPMS=.... is valid for all channels. The current setting applied via AT+CPMS will not be maintained over a power cycle. Defined values: PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 201 of 272

<mem1> string type ME SM

Description Memory from which messages are read and deleted (commands List Messages +CMGL, Read Message +CMGR and Delete Message +CMGD) ME message storage SIM message storage. Default value

<mem2> string type

Description Memory to which writing and sending operations are and Write Message to Memory +CMGW) ME message storage SIM message storage made (commands Send Message from Storage +CMSS

ME SM

<mem3> string type ME SM

Description Memory to which received SMSs are preferred to be stored (unless forwarded directly to TE). ME message storage SIM message storage

<used1>,<used2>,<used3> integer type

Description <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> respectively Total number of messages currently in

<total1>,<total2> ,<total3> integer type

Description Total number of message locations in

<mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> respectively

Examples: AT+CPMS=? +CPMS: (ME,SM),(ME,SM),("ME",SM) OK AT+CPMS? +CPMS: ME,0,100,SM,0,13,SM,0,13 OK PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 202 of 272

AT+CPMS=me,me,sm +CPMS: 0,100,0,100,0,13 OK 14.13 AT+CSCA Service Centre Address Common for both PDU and Text Modes
Description Set service centre address Show the current setting Command AT+CSCA=<sca> [,<tosca>] AT+CSCA? Possible Responses OK ERROR +CSCA: <sca>,<tosca> OK ERROR Test if the command is supported AT+CSCA=? OK ERROR

Description: Updates the SMSC address, through which mobile originated SMs are transmitted. In text mode, the setting is used by send (+CMGS) and write (+CMGW) commands. In PDU mode, the setting is used by the same commands, but only when the length of the SMSC address coded into <pdu> parameter equals zero. Note that a + in front of the number in <sca> has precedence over the <tosca> parameter, so that a number starting with + will always be treated as an international number. Defined values:
<sca> string type Description 3GPP TS 24.011 RP SC address Address-Value field in string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet selected TE character set characters) are converted to characters of the currently

<tosca> integer type 129

Description 3GPP TS 24.011 RP SC address type-of-address octet in integer format ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international unknown Default if no "+" in sca.

145

ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number Default if "+" in sca.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 203 of 272

<tosca> 161 128-255

Description ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number Other values refer 3GPP 24.008

Example: AT+CSCA? +CSCA: 44385016005,145 OK 14.14 AT+CSCS Select Character Set

Description Set command informs TA which character set is used by the TE Show the current setting

Command AT+CSCS=<chset>

Possible Responses OK ERROR

AT+CSCS?

+CSCS: <chset> OK ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CSCS=?

+CSCS: (list of supported OK ERROR <chset>s)

Description: This command informs the TA which character set <chset> is used by the TE. The TA is then able to convert character strings correctly between TE and ME character sets. When TA-TE interface is set to 8-bit operation and the used TE alphabet is 7-bit, the highest bit shall be set to zero. Read command shows current setting and test command display conversion schemes implemented in the TA. Defined values:
<chset> UCS2 GSM Description Unicode, 16-bit Universal Multiple Octet Coded Character Set 2 (ISO/IEC 10646) GSM default alphabet (3GPP 23.038). Note this setting

causes software flow control (Xon/Xoff) problems. Default value

IRA 8859-

International reference alphabet (ITU-T T.50). Note this is the recommended default setting by 3GPP 27.007 ISO 8859 graphic character sets, where n is an integer

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 204 of 272

<chset> n "UTF8"

Description Only the 8859-1 Latin1 character set is supported. Universal text format, 8 bit (1-6,C,A,G,H) that indicates the specific character set.

Example: AT+CSCS? +CSCS: GSM OK 14.15 AT+CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters Only Applicable to Text Mode
Description Set the text mode parameters Show the current setting Test if the command is supported AT+CSMP=? Command AT+CSMP=[<fo> [,<vp>[,<pid> [,<dcs>]]]] Possible Responses +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR +CSMP: <fo>,<vp>,<pid>,<dcs> +CME ERROR: <err> OK

AT+CSMP?

Description: Used to select values for additional parameters needed when SM is sent to the network or placed in a storage when text format message mode is selected. It is possible to set the validity period starting from when the SM is received by the SMSC (<vp> is in range 0 255). The <pid> parameter identifies the higher protocol being used or indicates interworking with a certain type of telematic service and <dcs> determines the way the information is encoded as in GSM 03.38. Defined values:
<fo> 0255 Description Depending on the command or result code: first octet of GSM 03.40 SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT (default value 2) in integer format 17),SMS-STATUS-REPORT, or SMS-COMMAND (Default value

<vp> 0-

Description (TP-VP+1) x 5 minutes (i.e 5 minutes intervals up to 12

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 205 of 272

<vp> 143 144167 168196 197255

Description hours) 12 hours + ((TP_VP-143) x 30 minutes) Default value is 167. (TP-VP-166) x 1 day (TP-VP-192) x 1 week

<pid> 0-255

Description according to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9 Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value is 0,

<dcs> 0-255

Description Data coding scheme. See GSM 03.38. UCS2 and compressed text not supported. Default value is 0.

14.16 AT+CSMS Select Message Service Common for both PDU and Text Modes
Description Select message service Command AT+CSMS=<service> Possible Responses <mt>,<mo>,<bm> +CMS ERROR: <err> OK ERROR Show the current setting AT+CSMS? +CSMS: <service>,<mt>,<mo>, <bm> OK ERROR Test if the command is supported AT+CSMS=? +CSMS: (list of supported <service>s) OK ERROR +CSMS:

Description: Selects messaging service <service>. It returns the types of messages supported by the ME: <mt> for mobile terminated messages, <mo> for mobile originated messages and <bm> for PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 206 of 272

broadcast type messages. If the chosen service is not supported by the ME (but is supported by the TA), final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. Defined values:
<service> 0 Description 3GPP 23.040 and 23.041. The syntax of SMS AT commands is compatible with 3GPP 27.005 Phase 2 version 4.7.0; Phase 2+ features which do not require new command syntax may be supported (e.g. correct routing of messages with new Phase 2+ data coding schemes) 2..127 Reserved

<mt> 0 1

Description Mobile terminated messages not supported Mobile terminated messages supported Default

<mo> 0 1

Description Mobile originated messages not supported Mobile originated messages supported Default

<bm> 0 1

Description Broadcast messages not supported Broadcast messages supported Default

14.17

AT*E2CMGA

Modify message attribute

Description Set

Command AT*E2CMGA=<op>,<index>[,< attr>]

Possible

Responses *E2CMGA: <attr> (for read operation) OK ERROR

message attribute

Test if the command is

AT*E2CMGA=?

of supported supported

*E2CMGA: (list

supported

<op>s),(list of

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 207 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Responses <index>es,(list of supported <attr>s)

Description: This command reads or modifies (selected by <op>) the attributes for a specific message selected by <index>. Defined values:
<op> 0 1 Description Read attribute Write attribute

<index> Integer type (1-65535)

Description Index number of message to be modified

<attr> 0 1 2 3

Description Received-unread Received-read Stored unsent (only for <op>=0, read attribute) Stored sent (only for <op>=0, read attribute)

14.18

AT+CRES

Restore SMS Settings

Description Restore settings

Command AT+CRES[=<profile>]

Possible Responses +CMS ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Test if the

command is supported

AT+CRES=?

supported

+CRES: (list of

<profile>s) +CMS ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 208 of 272

Description: This command restores message service settings saved by +CSAS from non-volatile SIM memory to active memory. A SIM can contain several profiles of settings. Only the settings controlled by AT+CSCA are stored with this command. Defined values:
<profile> 0..1 Description value is 0 Profile number where settings are to be stored. Default

Note: The ATZ command is used to restore all other parameters settings. AT+CRES only restores parameters set by AT+CSCA. 14.19 AT+CSAS Save SMS Settings

Description Save Settings

Command AT+CSAS[=<profile>]

Possible Responses <err> OK ERROR +CMS ERROR:

Test if the command is supported

AT+CSAS=?

+CSAS: (list of supported <profile>s) +CMS ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Description: This command saves active message service settings to SIM memory. A TA can contain several settings profiles. Only the settings specified in the Service Centre Address command, +CSCA, are saved. Test command displays the supported profile numbers for reading and writing of settings. Defined values:
<profile> 0..1 Description be stored. Default value is 0 Manufacturer specific profile number where settings are to

Note: The AT&W command is used to save all other parameters settings. AT+CSAS only stores parameters set by AT+CSCA.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 209 of 272

15

Short Message Services - Cell Broadcast


15.1 AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Type Common for both PDU and text modes
Description Select cell broadcast message type Command +CSCB=[<mode>[,< mids>[,<dcss>]]] Possible Responses +CMS ERROR: <err> OK ERROR AT+CSCB? +CSCB: <mode>,<mids>,<dcss > OK ERROR Test if the command is supported AT+CSCB=? +CSCB: (list of supported <mode>s) OK ERROR

Show the current setting

Description: Selects which types of CBMs are to be received by the ME. Note that for mode 0, a value for <dcss> should be entered to specify which <dcss> should be accepted. Defined values:
<mode> 0 1 Description Default value. Message types in <mids> and <dcss> are accepted. Message types in <mids> and <dcss> are not accepted Not supported

<mids> string type

Description 3GPP 23.041 CBM Message Identifier in integer format. All different possible combinations of CBM message identifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string); e.g. 0,1,5-7

<dcss> string

Description 3GPP 23.038 CBM Data Coding Scheme in integer format.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 210 of 272

<dcss> type

Description All different possible combinations of CBM data coding 3,5" schemes (refer <dcs>) (default is empty string); e.g. "0-

Example: AT+CSCB? +CSCB: 0,50,"1" OK 15.2 AT*EMWI Message Waiting Indication Notes: * - SIM is required for query. ** - Query will not operate in CFUN mode 4.
Description Set message waiting indication Shows the current setting Show if the command is supported Response Command AT*EMWI =<mode> AT*EMWI? AT*EMWI=? Possible Responses OK +CME ERROR: <err> ERROR: <err> <mode>s) +CME ERROR: <err> *EMWI: <unsolicited>, <status>, (<count>) *EMWI: <mode>+CME

*EMWI: (list of supported

Description: This command interrogates voice mail status. This AT command shall provide an indication of waiting messages and message count if available. An unsolicited result code shall be enabled/disabled to inform the host of a new message waiting. The host can read at power up. USIM file contents shall have priority over CPHS contents. Defined values:
<mode> 0 1 2 Description Disable unsolicited voice mail indication. Enable unsolicited voice mail indication. Default value. Query voice mail indication for all lines.

<unsolicited> 0

Description This is a solicited response.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 211 of 272

<unsolicited> 1

Description This is an unsolicited response.

<status> 0 1

Description The specific line has no voice mail waiting. The specific line has voice mail waiting.

<count> 0255

Description Integer type. Count of messages waiting, if available.

Example: Query command AT*EMWI=2 *EMWI: 0,1,1 OK

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 212 of 272

16

SIM Commands
16.1 AT+CRSM Restricted SIM Access

Description Transmit command

Command AT+CRSM=<command >[,<fileid>[, <P1>,<P2>,<P3>[,<da ta>[,<pathid>]]]] AT+CRSM=?

Possible Responses +CRSM: nse>] OK <sw1>,<sw2>[,<respo +CME ERROR: <err>

Test if the command is

supported

Description: By using this command instead of Generic SIM Access +CSIM TE application has easier but more limited access to the SIM database. This command transmits to the MT the SIM <command> and its required parameters. MT handles internally all SIM-MT interface locking and file selection routines. As response to the command, MT sends the actual SIM information parameters and response data. MT error result code +CME ERROR may be returned when the command cannot be passed to the SIM, but failure in the execution of the command in the SIM is reported in <sw1> and <sw2> parameters. The TE should be aware of the precedence of the GSM/UMTS application commands internal to the MT over the commands issued by the TE. Additional Information: When accessing a SIM/USIM some <fileid> values are common between the different directory paths. In order to unambiguously specify which common <fileid> is intended the command *ECDF must first be used to select the active directory path to be used by +CRSM. Note that the *ECDF command effectively sets the active directory for all subsequent +CRSM use. Even if an EF can be uniquely identified by its <fileid> alone, if the correct directory has not been selected by *ECDF then the file will not be accessible. Defined values:
<command> 176 178 192 Description (SIM commands defined in 3GPP 51.011) READ BINARY READ RECORD GET RESPONSE

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 213 of 272

<command> 214 220 Other values

Description (SIM commands defined in 3GPP 51.011) UPDATE BINARY UPDATE RECORD Reserved

NOTE 1: The MT internally executes all commands necessary for selecting the desired file, before performing the actual command.

<fileid> decimal integer

Description Identifier of a elementary datafile on SIM. Mandatory for every command except GET RESPONSE The values are defined in 3GPP 51.011.

NOTE 2: The range of valid file identifiers depends on the actual SIM and is defined in 3GPP 51.011. Optional files may not be present at all.
<p1>,<p2>,<p3> integer Description Parameters passed on by the MT to the SIM. These parameters are mandatory for every command, except GET RESPONSE. The values are defined in 3GPP 51.011

<data> hexadecimal character data (refer to +CSCS)

Description Information which shall be written to the SIM

<pathid> hexadecimal string type

Description The path of an elementary file on the SIM/UICC in hexadecimal format as defined in ETSI TS 102 221

<sw1>,<sw2> integer

Description Information from the SIM about the execution of the actual command. These parameters are delivered to the TE in both cases, on successful or failed execution of the command

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 214 of 272

<response> hexadecimal

Description Response of a successful completion of the command previously issued The GET RESPONSE command return data which gives information about the current elementary and its size (refer to 3GPP 51.011) datafield. This information includes the type of file After the READ BINARY or READ RECORD command, the requested data will be returned A <response> is not returned after a successful UPDATE BINARY or UPDATE RECORD command

Command Help The AT+CRSM description in the 27.007 spec only shows the general syntax, and refers the reader to other specs for specific SIM/USIM commands. Here are a few specific examples. READ BINARY: AT+CRSM=176,<fileid>,<OffsetHi>,<OffsetLo>,<Len> UPDATE BINARY: AT+CRSM=214,<fileid>,<OffsetHi>,<OffsetLo>,<Len>,"<data>" READ RECORD: AT+CRSM=178,<fileid>,<RecNum>,<mode>,<RecLen> UPDATE RECORD: AT+CRSM=220,<fileid>,<RecNum>,<mode>,<RecLen>,"<data>" Parameters: <fileid> Must be entered in decimal <RecNum> Record number, starting at record 1. <mode> 2=Next record. <RecNum> must be 0. 3=Previous. <RecNum> must be 0. 4=Absolute. If <RecNum> = 0, then Current record. <Len> Length of file, in bytes. <RecLen> Length of record, in bytes. <data> Hex data, two hex digits per byte. Examples: Read record 1 of linear fixed file 0x6F47 (28487). It has 30 bytes/record. AT+CRSM=178,28487,1,4,30 +CRSM: 144,0,"00FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFF" Read the next record. AT+CRSM=178,28487,0,2,30

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 215 of 272

+CRSM: 144,0,"00FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFF" Update record 1. AT+CRSM=220,28487,1,4,30,"1111111111111111111111111111111111 11111111111111111111111111" +CRSM: 144,0 Read binary file 6F7E (28542). It has 11 bytes. AT+CRSM=176,28542,0,0,11 +CRSM: 144,0,"FFFFFFFF130130012D0001" Update binary file 6F7E. AT+CRSM=214,28542,0,0,11,"0123456789ABCDEF012345" +CRSM: 144,0 16.2 AT+CPIN PIN Control

Description Request PIN Control

Command AT+CPIN=<pin>[,<newpin>]

Possible Responses ERROR: <err> OK ERROR +CME

Show the current setting

AT+CPIN?

<code> +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

+CPIN:

Test if the

command is supported

AT+CPIN=?

ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

+CME

Description: Sends the password to the ME, which is necessary to make the ME operational (SIM PIN or SIM PUK). If the PIN is to be entered twice, the TA autonomously repeats the PIN. If no PIN request is PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 216 of 272

pending, no action is taken towards the ME and an error message (+CME ERROR <err>) is returned to the TE. If the PIN required is PUK, the second pin is required. This second PIN, <newpin>, is used to replace the old PIN in the SIM in the active application in the UICC (GSM or USIM) or SIM card. Note: Commands which interact with MT that are accepted when MT is pending SIM PIN or SIM PUK are: +CGMI, +CGMM, +CGMR, +CGSN, D112; (emergency call), +CPAS, +CFUN, +CPIN and +CIND (read and test command only). Defined values:
<pin>,<newpin> string Description The range for the SIM PIN is 4 - 8 digits. The SIM PUK consists of 8 digits. PH-NET PIN, PH-NETSUB PIN, PH-SP PIN, PH-CORP PIN, PH-ESL PIN and PH-SIMLOCK PIN are 8-16 digits.

<code> READY SIM PIN SIM PUK PH-SIM PIN SIM PIN2

Description MT is not pending for any password ME is waiting for UICC/SIM PIN to be given ME is waiting for UICC/SIM PUK to be given ME is waiting for ME_lock_code password to be given (PCK in 3GPP 22.022). ME is waiting active application in the UICC (GSM or

USIM) or SIM card PIN2 to be given (this <code> is to be returned only when the last executed command resulted in PIN2 authentication failure (i.e. +CME ERROR: 17); if PIN2 is not entered right after the failure, the ME does not block its operation)

SIM PUK2

ME is waiting active application in the UICC (GSM or USIM) or SIM card PUK2 to be given (this <code> is to be returned only when the last executed command resulted in PUK2 authentication failure (i.e. +CME right after the failure, the ME does not block its operation) ERROR: 18); if PUK2 and new PIN2 are not entered

PH-NET PIN PHNETSUB PIN

ME is waiting network personalization password to be given (NCK in 3GPP 22.022). ME is waiting network subset personalization password to be given (NSCK in 3GPP 22.022).

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 217 of 272

<code> PH-SP PIN PH-CORP PIN PIN PH-ESLBLOCKED

Description ME is waiting service provider personalization password to be given (SPCK in 3GPP 22.022). ME is waiting corporate personalization password to be given (CCK in 3GPP 22.022). Extended SIM-Lock. Ericsson specific

The SIM card is blocked for the user.

Example: AT+CPIN=0000 OK 16.3 AT*EPEE Pin Event

Description Enable/disable PIN1 code events

Command AT*EPEE=<onoff>

Possible Responses +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Read the current status for PIN1 Code Request

AT*EPEE?

*EPEE: <onoff> +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT*EPEE=?

supported

*EPEE: (list of

<onoff>s) +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Description: The command requests the module to report when the PIN1 code has been entered and accepted.
<onoff> 0 1 Description Request for report on correctly entered PIN1 code is not activated (off). Default value Request for report on correctly inserted PIN1 code is activated (on)

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 218 of 272

16.3.1

*EPEV

Pin Event Unsolicited report

The *EPEV PIN Event code unsolicited response is issued when a pin code has been entered and accepted. The unsolicited reports are enabled using the AT*EPEE command (see above). The *EPEV unsolicited response has the following syntax (no parameters): *EPEV 16.4 AT*E2SSN SIM Serial Number

Description Request SIM Serial number Shows if the command is supported

Command AT*E2SSN AT*E2SSN= ?

Possible Responses <SSN> OK ERROR

Description: This command requests the SIM serial number held in the ICCid field (address 2FE2) on the SIM and returns all valid characters to the TE. This field is detailed in GSM 11.11 section 10.1.1. Defined values:
<SSN> String without double quotes Description SIM serial number

Examples: AT*E2SSN 8944110063503224707 OK where the raw data contained in the ICCid field on the SIM is 984411003605234207F7. Test command: AT*E2SSN=? OK 16.5 AT+CIMI Subscriber Identification

Description Read IMSI

Command AT+CIMI

Possible Responses <IMSI> +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CIMI =?

OK ERROR

Description: PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 219 of 272

Causes the TA to return <IMSI>, identifying the individual SIM attached to the ME. Defined values:
<IMSI> string without double quotes Description International Mobile Subscriber Identity

Examples: AT+CIMI 234157411545420 OK 16.6 AT*EPIN Additional PIN Information

Description Request PIN information

Command AT*EPIN?

Possible Responses <chv2>,<unbl_chv2> OK ERROR +CME ERROR <err> *EPIN:<chv1>,<unbl_chv1>,

Test if the command is supported

AT*EPIN=?

OK ERROR

Description: This command returns the number of remaining attempts of entering the correct PIN code for the SIM card in use. The command returns the number of remaining attempts for both PIN1 (CHV1), PIN2 (CHV2), PUK1 (unblock CHV1) and PUK2 (unblock CHV2). The user has 3 attempts of entering the correct PIN. If unsuccessful the third time, the SIM will be Blocked. The attempts can occur in separate sessions. This command is available without SIM access. The setting is persistent through a power cycle. Defined values:
<chv1>,<cvh2> 0 1..3 Description No more attempts remain Number of remaining attempts

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 220 of 272

<unbl_chv1>,<unbl_cvh2> 0 1..10

Description No more attempts remain Number of remaining attempts

16.7

AT+CEAP

EAP Authentication

Description Exchange EAP packets

Syntax AT+CEAP=<dfname>, <EAPMethod>, <EAP_packet_data>[,<DFeap>]

Possible responses +CEAP: <EAPsessionid> , <EAP_packet_re sp> +CME ERROR: <err>

Read the current setting Test command the is to show if command supported

Not applicable

AT+CEAP=?

OK +CME ERROR: <err>

Description: This command allows a TE to exchange EAP packets with the UICC or the ME. Prior to the execution of this command, the TE shall retrieve the available AIDs using the +CUAD command. The TE shall select one appropriate AID to be addressed. Selection may include asking the user, and considering EAP methods supported by the AIDs. The TE shall set the <dfname> value using the selected AID and shall set the <EAPMethod> value to the requested EAP method. The TE may set the <DFeap> value to the directory file identifier that is applicable to the <EAPMethod>; which is derived from the discretionary data returned by +CUAD. The parameter is mandatory for EAP terminated in UICC. If the targeted application on the UICC does support the requested EAP method, the MT shall use the value provided in <DFeap>, and it shall transmit the <EAP_packet_data> to the UICC application using the Authenticate APDU command as defined in ETSI TS 102 310. The appropriate DFEAP in the ADF must be selected prior to the submission of an EAP Authenticate command with the <EAP packet data>. Then the EAP Response data sent by the UICC PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 221 of 272

application in its response to the Authenticate command shall be provided to the TE in <EAP_packet_resp>. If the targeted application on the UICC does not support the requested EAP method and if the MT does support this method then the <EAP packet data> shall be handled by the MT. During the handling of the EAP method, the MT shall run the authentication algorithm on the SIM or USIM, respectively. Also the MT has to allocate an <EAPsessionid> in order to identify an EAP session and its corresponding keys and parameters. If neither the MT nor the appropriate UICC application support the requested EAP method, the MT shall respond with CME ERROR: 49, (EAP method not supported). Additional Information Note that this implementation supports only UICC handling of EAP methods. Defined values:
<dfname> Hexadecimal String type Description all selectable applications represented in the UICC by an AID are referenced by a DF name coded on 1 to 16 bytes.

<EAPMethod> Hexadecimal String type

Description this is the EAP Method Type as defined in RFC 3748 in 1 byte format or in 8 byte expanded format.

<EAP_packet_data> Hexadecimal String type

Description as defined in ETSI TS 102 310

<DFeap> Hexadecimal String type

Description Contains the DF(EAP) associated with the defined in ETSI TS 102 310 specified <EAPMethod> on the SIM/UICC as

<EAPsessionid> Integer type

Description this is the identifier of the EAP session to be used in order to retrieve the EAP parameters with the +CERP command. Value range is from 1 to 4294967295

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 222 of 272

<EAP_packet_resp> Hexadecimal String type

Description as defined in ETSI TS 102 310

16.8

AT+CERP

EAP Retrieve Parameters

Description Retreive EAP parameters Read the current setting Test

Syntax +CERP=<EAPsessi onid>,<EAPparam eter> Not applicable

Possible responses +CERP:<EAP_parameter_res ponse> +CME ERROR: <err>

command the is

AT+CERP=?

OK +CME ERROR: <err>

to show if command supported

Description: This command allows a TE to retrieve EAP session parameters / derived keys after a run of the +CEAP command. If the EAP session is handled by the UICC then the MT shall return the content of the elementary file corresponding to the indicated <EAPparameter>. Those EFs are defined in ETSI TS 102 310. If the MT handles the EAP session then the MT shall return the corresponding parameter encoded as defined for EAP files, see ETSI TS 102 310. For example, the keys shall be retrieved in the TLV format described in ETSI TS 102 310. If neither the MT nor the appropriate UICC application can provide the requested information (e.g. because the requested EAP session ID does not exist), the MT will respond with CME ERROR: 50, (Incorrect parameters). Additional Information Note that this implementation supports only UICC handling of EAP methods. Defined values:
<EAPparameter> 01 02 Description Keys Status

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 223 of 272

<EAPparameter> 03 04

Description Identity Pseudonym

<EAPsessionid> Integer type

Description order to retrieve the EAP parameters corresponding this is the identifier of the EAP session to be used in

to an active EAP session with EAP Retreive Parameters +CERP command.

<EAP_parameter_response> Hexadecimal string

Description <EAPparameter>; format of the TS 102 310 depends on the value of

parameter response is as defined in ETSI

16.9

AT+CUAD

UICC Application Discovery

Description Read the available UICC applications

Syntax +CUAD

Possible responses +CUAD: <response> +CME ERROR: <err>

Read the current setting Test command to show if the command is supported

applicable AT+CUAD=? OK +CME ERROR: <err>

Not

Description: This command asks the MT to discover what applications are available for selection on the UICC. According to TS 102.221, the ME shall access and read the EFDIR file in the UICC and return the values that are stored in its records. Each record contains the AID and optionally application parameters of one of the applications available on the UICC. Defined values:
<response> Hexedecimal string Description the response is the content of the EFDIR

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 224 of 272

17

SIM Application Toolkit


17.1 AT*ESTKMENU Menu Selection

Description Do the menu selection

Command AT*ESTKMENU=<item>

Possible responses +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT*ESTKMENU=?

+CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

Description: User has selected a menu item set up by the SET UP MENU proactive command from the SIM/USIM. Defined values:
<item> Integer type Description The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. It identifies the selected menu item corresponding to SET-UP MENU command.

17.2

AT*ESTKRES Terminal Response

Description Send the TERMINAL RESPONSE command is supported Test if the

Syntax AT*ESTKRES=<command >,<result>,[<result2>],[ <text>],[<id>] AT*ESTKRES=?

Possible Responses OK +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Description: This AT command provides the method for responding to the SIM/USIM Toolkit commands. The host will provide as much information that it knows. In some instances, the wireless PC300 AT Command Manual Page 225 of 272 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

modem device will have more detailed information and is expected to provide this in the TERMINAL RESPONSE sent to the SIM/USIM. Defined values:
<command> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Description DISPLAY TEXT GET INKEY GET INPUT PLAY TONE SELECT ITEM SEND SS SEND USSD SET UP CALL SET UP MENU BLANK REFRESH SEND SHORT MESSAGE OPEN CHANNEL CLOSE CHANNEL RECEIVE DATA SEND DATA

<result> decimal integer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 16

Description value for <result> must be entered as a decimal integer as listed. Command performed successfully Command performed with partial comprehension Command performed with missing information REFRESH performed with additional EFs read icon could not be displayed SIM Command performed successfully but requested Command performed but modified by call control by

Command performed successfully, limited service Command performed with modification Proactive SIM/USIM session terminated successfully

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 226 of 272

<result> 17 18 19 20 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58

Description Backward move in proactive SIM/USIM session requested No response from user Help information required by user not supported USSD transaction terminated by the user Host currently unable to process command Network currently unable to process command User did not accept call set up request User cleared down call before connection or network release Action in contradiction with the current timer state not supported Interaction with call control by SIM, temporary problem Launch browser generic error not supported Command beyond hosts capabilities Command type not understood by host Command data not understood by host Command number not known by host SS Return Error (error cause handled by wireless modem device SMS RPERROR Error, required values are missing USSD Return Error (error cause provide by wireless modem device not supported Interaction with call control by SIM or MO SM control by SIM, permanent problem Bearer independent Protocol error Multiple card command error

<result2> 0

Description No specific cause can be given

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 227 of 272

<result2> 1 2 3 7 8

Description Screen is busy Host currently busy on call Host currently busy on SS transaction Not in speech call Host currently busy on USSD transaction

<text> String type

Description 0-9,*,#,+ GSM 3.38 SMS default alphabet (unpacked) YES/NO

<id> 1-255

Description Identifier of menu item for the SELECT ITEM command

Note: For <command>=7 (SET UP CALL), the <text> parameter is required as the number to call. Note: A call that is originated from a SIM proactive command has to be hung up using the command AT*estkres=7,16 17.3 AT*ESTKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings

Description Set the presentation of the unsolicited result STK codes corresponding to

Command AT*ESTKS=<on_off>

Possible responses <err> OK ERROR +CME ERROR

Show the current setting

AT*ESTKS?

*ESTKS: <on_off> +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT*ESTKS=?

*ESTKS: list of supported <on_off>

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 228 of 272

Description

Command

Possible responses +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

Description: Allows the external application to disable or enable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes corresponding to the STK commands. Parameter <on_off> is used to disable or enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code *ESTK. Setting chosen is stored internally so that it is not necessary to change it each time the ME is switched on. If the presentation of the unsolicited result codes is disabled, the messages below are not sent to the application. The unsolicited result codes shall be disabled by default. Defined values:
<on_off> 0 1 Description Disable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes related to STK. Default value Enable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes related to STK

17.4 17.4.1

SIM Toolkit Unsolicited Result Codes *ESTKCALL Set Up Call

Comman d

Possible responses AT*ESTKCALL=<mode>,[<alphaid>],<codetype>,<dest >,[<duration>,<capabilityconfig>,<CallSetupAlphaId>

Description: The host will handle the initiation of new calls by the SIM/USIM Toolkit. Defined values:
<mode> 0 1 2 Description Set up call, but only if not currently busy on another call with redial Set up call, but only if not currently busy on another call,

Set up call, putting all other calls (if any) on hold

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 229 of 272

<mode> 3 4 5

Description Set up call, putting all other calls (if any) on hold, with redial Set up call, disconnecting all other calls (if any) redial Set up call, disconnecting all other calls (if any), with

<alphaid> String type

Description Corresponds to Alpha Identifier specified in 51.014 and 31.111 For <codetype>=0, this is a displayable text string. For <codetype>=1, this is an ASCII hexadecimal string representation of the UCS2 2-octet characters.

<codetype> 0 1

Description SMS default alphabet UCS2 alphabet

<dest>

Description Destination address (called party number)

<duration> integer type

Description redial duration (milliseconds)

Response The response to SET UP CALL is TERMINAL RESPONSE as follows AT*ETSTKRES=7,<result>,<dialstring>,<result2>


<result> 0 16 17 18 32 33 Description Command performed successfully Proactive SIM/USIM session terminated successfully Backward move in proactive SIM/USIM session requested No response from user Host currently unable to process command (require <result2>) Network currently unable to process command

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 230 of 272

<result> 34 35 48 52

Description User did not accept call set-up request User cleared down call before connection or network release Command beyond Host capabilities SS Return Error (Firmware to provide the error cause to SIM/USIM)

<dialstring> string type

Description 0-9,*,#,+

<result2> 2 3

Description Host currently busy on call Host currently busy on SS Transaction

17.4.2

*ESTKCC Call Control Event From SIM/USIM Application Toolkit

Command

Possible Responses AT*ESTKCC: <resultMode>[,<errCode>, <oldType>[,<newType>]],<alpha>

When Call Control by SIM/USIM is activated in SIM/USIM Profile, the result of the STK Call Control will return as this unsolicited event.
<resultMode> 1 2 3 4 Description Allowed, no modification. Allowed, modified (type or dial string). Not allowed. Call control failed.

<errCode> 0 1 2 3

Description Call not allowed. SIM/USIM toolkit is busy, cannot setup call. SIM/USIM error causes setup fail. There is other ongoing call setup.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 231 of 272

<errCode> 4 5 6 7

Description Beyond ME capabilities. Call control by SIM/USIM, modified. Call control by SIM/USIM, not allowed, temporary. Call control by SIM/USIM, not allowed, permanent.

<oldType>, <newType> 1 2 3 4

Description Voice Call. SS. USSD. SMS.

<alpha> String type

Description Alphanumeric representation of the alpha ID text that is displayed along with the STK CC result.

Note: When <resultMode> is not Call Control failed, the <errCode> field will not be present. *ESTKCC: <resultMode>,<oldType>,<newType>,<alpha> When <resultMode> is Call Control failed, the <errCode> field will always be present and the <newType> field will not be present. *ESTKCC: <resultMode>,<errCode >,< oldType >,<alpha> 17.4.3 *ESTKDISP Display Text

Command Displays text of unsolicited

Possible responses AT*ESTKDISP: <priority>,<clear>,<codetype><CR><LF><data>

result code

Description: The ME passes the parameters within DISPLAY TEXT command to the external application by means of the unsolicited result code *ESTKDISP. Command AT*ESTKDISP allows the external application to send the appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and before the timeout expires. If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR response is generated. Test command returns the list of supported <answer>. Values follow GSM 11.14 standard PC300 AT Command Manual Page 232 of 272 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Defined values:
<priority> 0 1 Description Display normal priority text Display high priority text

<clear> 0 1

Description Clear message after a delay (60s) Wait for user to clear message

<codetype> 0 1

Description SMS default alphabet UCS2 alphabet

<data> string

Description Text of message to be displayed. 240 characters maximum For <codetype>=0, this is a displayable text string. For <codetype>=1, this is an ASCII hexadecimal string representation of the UCS2 2-octet characters.

Response AT*ESTKRES=0,<result>,[<result2>]
<result> 0 16 17 32 Description Command performed successfully Hang up call Backward move in proactive SIM/USIM session requested Host currently unable to process command (require <result2>)

<result2> 1

Description Screen busy

17.4.4

*ESTKGIN Get Input

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 233 of 272

Comman d

Possible responses AT*ESTKGIN: ><data> <input>,<codetype>,<echo>,<minl>,<maxl><CR><LF

Description: The host will display this request for input from the SIM/USIM Toolkit application. Data entered by the user shall be returned to the wireless modem device. Defined values:
<input> 1 2 Description 0-9, *, #, + only Alphabet set

<codetype> 0 1

Description SMS default alphabet UCS2 alphabet

<echo> 1 0

Description Echo user input on display Hide user input

<minl> 0 1255

Description No minimum length Minimum length

<maxl> 255 0254

Description No maximum length Maximum length

<data> String type

Description Text to be displayed For <codetype>=0, this is a displayable text string.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 234 of 272

<data>

Description For <codetype>=1, this is an ASCII hexadecimal string representation of the UCS2 2-octet characters.

Response: AT*ESTKRES=2,<result>,,<text>
<result> 0 16 17 18 Description Command performed successfully Proactive SIM/USIM session terminated successfully Backward move in proactive SIM/USIM session requested No response from user

<text> String type

Description Single digit within this range: 0-9,*,# or + GSM 3.38 SMS default alphabet, unpacked

17.4.5

*ESTKKEY Get Inkey

Command

Possible responses AT*ESTKKEY:<input>,<codetype><CR><LF><data >

Description: The host will display the text message provided in *ESTKKEY. The single character or digit shall be returned to the wireless modem device. Defined values:
<input> 0 1 2 Description YES/NO 0-9,*,#,+ only Alphabet set

<codetype> 0

Description SMS default alphabet

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 235 of 272

<codetype> 1

Description UCS2 alphabet

<data> String type

Description Text to be displayed For <codetype>=0, this is a displayable text string. For <codetype>=1, this is an ASCII hexadecimal string representation of the UCS2 2-octet characters.

Response AT*ESTKRES=1,<result>,,<text>
<result> 0 16 18 32 Description Command performed successfully Proactive SIM/USIM session terminated successfully No response from user Host currently unable to process command (require <result2>)

<text> String type

Description Single digit within this range: 0-9,*,# or + A single character from GSM 3.38 SMS default alphabet, unpacked

17.4.6

*ESTKITEM

Select Item

Comman d

Possible responses AT*ESTKITEM:<title>,<codetype>,<numitems><CR><LF ><id1>,<text1>[<CR><LF><id2>,<text2><CR><LF> <idn><texto>]

Description: The host will display a list of items and return the selected item to wireless modem device. Defined values:
<title> String type Description Text describing menu

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 236 of 272

<title>

Description For <codetype>=0, this is a displayable text string. For <codetype>=1, this is an ASCII hexadecimal string representation of the UCS2 2-octet characters.

<codetype> 0 1

Description SMS default alphabet UCS2 alphabet

<numitems> 1-255

Description The number of menu items to display

<id> 1-255

Description The identifier of menu item

<text> String type

Description Text of menu item For <codetype>=0, this is a displayable text string. For <codetype>=1, this is an ASCII hexadecimal string representation of the UCS2 2-octet characters.

Response AT*ESTKRES=4,<result>,,,<id>
<result> 0 16 17 18 Description Command performed successfully Proactive SIM/USIM session terminated successfully Backward move in proactive SIM/USIM session requested No response from user

<id> 1-255

Description Identifier of menu item

17.4.7

*ESTKRSH

Refresh

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 237 of 272

Command

Possible responses AT*ESTKRSH: <refreshType>[<CR><LF><EF list>]

Description: The REFRESH command contains the refresh type and the list of EF files (separated by comma), if any. In the case the refresh type is not SIM/USIM RESET, EF list will be given and cached data in the firmware will be updated. The host will need to update any cached data and respond with Terminal Response to inform the SIM/USIM if the command is carried out successfully. If the response is not result=0 or 3, the same command will be send again. In the case the refresh type is SIM/USIM RESET, the host will need to response if the reset can be carried out (result=0) or currently unable to process the reset (result=20). If the response is result=0, the firmware will be reset, and the host will need to turn radio back on again. To save unsaved data, the host shall perform such task before responding back to the firmware using Terminal Response. If the response result=20, the firmware will resend the command again at a later time. Defined values:
<refresh type> 0 1 2 3 4 Description Initialization with full file change File change Initialization with file change SIM/USIM Initialization SIM/USIM Reset

<EF

list>

Description List of EF files that have changed corresponding to file definitions given in the standard. No files have changed

0xFF

Response The response to REFRESH is TERMINAL RESPONSE described as follows: AT*ESTKRES=10 ,<result>, [<result2>]
<result> 0 3 32 Description Command performed successfully Refresh performed with additional EF files read Host currently unable to process command (require <result2>)

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 238 of 272

<result2> 1 2

Description Screen busy Host currently busy on call

17.4.8

*ESTKSMENU Set Up Menu

Comman d

Possible responses AT*ESTKSMENU:<alphaid>,<codetype>,<itemcount><CR ><LF><id1>,<text1>[,<CR><LF><id2>,<text2><CR> <LF>,<idn>,<texto>

Description: The SET UP MENU command is used to add SIM/USIM applications for selection to the host application menu system. The SET UP MENU command is also used to remove SIM/USIM applications from the menu system. Defined values:
<alphaid> String type NULL Description Text description of menu Indicates that the alphaid is not available

<codetype> 0 1

Description SMS default alphabet UCS2 alphabet

<itemcount> integer type

Description number of items

<id> 1-255

Description Item number of menu item

<text> String type

Description Text for menu item

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 239 of 272

Response: AT*ESTKRES=8,<result>
<result> 0 48 Description Command performed successfully Command beyond host capabilities

17.4.9

*ESTKSMS

Send Short Message

Command

Possible responses AT*ESTKSMS: [<alphaid>],<alphabet>,<result>

Description: The wireless modem device will be responsible for sending the SIM/USIM Toolkit application SMS message. The result of sending the message shall be reported to the host. The host will display an info. Box indicating that an SMS message was sent. However, this will be received after the fact. If <alphaid> is not sent with the AT command, then the host will inform the user that an SMS had been sent with a generic display message. If the Alpha id is valid then it will be displayed. If the SEND SHORT MESSAGE command from the SIM/USIM contains an empty/NULL Alpha Identifier, then this AT command shall not be sent to the host. Defined values:
<alphaid> Description Corresponds to Alpha Identifier specified in 51.014 and 31.111

<alphabet> 0 1

Description SMS default alphabet UCS2 alphabet

<result> 0 1

Description SMS sent successfully SMS operation failed

Response AT*ESTKRES=11,0

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 240 of 272

17.4.10

*ESTKSS Send SS

Command

Possible responses AT*ESTKSS:<alphaid>,<codetype>,<SSstring>

Description: The host will support parsing the SSstring and initiating the SS procedures. When the alpha id is sent by the SIM/USIM toolkit application, it will be displayed while the host is processing the Supplementary Service procedure. If the alpha id indicates that it is empty, then no indication is given to the user that a supplementary service procedure is being processed. If no alpha id is provided, then the normal procedures for processing a supplementary service procedure shall be followed. The SS procedure will not be included in the Last Number Dialed list. Defined values:
<alpha_id> String type Description Text message to be displayed while processing Supplementary Service string For <codetype>=0, this is a displayable text string. For <codetype>=1, this is an ASCII hexadecimal string representation of the UCS2 2-octet characters. NULL Empty alpha identifier

<codetype> 0 1

Description SMS default alphabet UCS2 alphabet

<SS_string> String type

Description a supplementary service control procedure, coded as for EF_ADN

Response: AT*ESTKRES=5,<result>,<result2>
<result> 0 16 17 18 Description Command performed successfully Proactive SIM/USIM session terminated successfully Backward move in proactive SIM/USIM session requested No response from user

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 241 of 272

<result> 32 33 48 52

Description Host currently unable to process command (require <result2>) Network currently unable to process command Command beyond Host capabilities SS Return Error (firmware must provide the error cause

<result2> 3

Description Host currently busy on SS transaction

17.4.11

*ESTKTONE

Play Tone

Command

Possible responses AT*ESTKTONE: [<alphaid>],[<codetype>],<tone>,[<unit>,<duration>]

Description: AT*ESTKTONE is sent to the host to play a tone. Defined values:


<alpha_id> String type Description Text message to be displayed during tone For <codetype>=0, this is a displayable text string. For <codetype>=1, this is an ASCII hexadecimal string representation of the UCS2 2-octet characters. NULL Indicates an empty alphaid

<codetype> 0 1

Description SMS default alphabet UCS2 alphabet

<tone> 8 10 11 12

Description Ringing tone General Beep Positive acknowledgement Negative acknowledgement Maybe others

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 242 of 272

<unit> 0 1 2

Description Minutes Seconds Tenths of seconds

<duration> 1-255

Description Value in <units>

Response: AT*ESTKRES=3,<result>
<result> 0 16 17 48 Description Command performed successfully Proactive SIM/USIM session terminated successfully Backward move in proactive SIM/USIM session requested Command beyond hosts capabilities

17.4.12

*ESTKUSSD

Send USSD

Command

Possible responses AT*ESTKUSSD: [<alpha_id>],<codetype>,<USSDstring>

Description: The host shall support parsing the USSDstring and initiating the USSD procedures. When the alpha id is sent by the SIM/USIM toolkit application, it will be displayed while the host is processing the initial USSD procedure. If the alpha id indicates that it is empty, then no indication is given to the user that a USSD procedure is being processed. If no alpha_id is provided, then the normal procedures for processing a USSD procedure shall be followed. The USSD procedure will not be included in the Last Number Dialed list. Defined values:
<alpha_id> String type NULL Description Text message to be displayed Indicates an empty alphaid

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 243 of 272

<codetype> 0 1

Description SMS default alphabet UCS2 alphabet

<USSDstring> String type

Description USSD string, coded as for EF_ADN

Response: AT*ESTKRES=6,<result>,<result2>
<result> 0 16 17 18 20 32 33 48 52 55 Description Command performed successfully Proactive SIM/USIM session terminated successfully Backward move in proactive SIM/USIM session requested No response from user USSD transaction terminated by the user Host currently unable to process command (require <result2>) Network currently unable to process command Command beyond hosts capabilities SS Return Error (wireless modem device must provide the error cause) USSD Return Error (wireless modem device must provide the error cause

<result2> 3 8

Description Currently busy on SS transaction Currently busy on USSD transaction

17.4.13

*ESTKSIMT

Setup Idle Mode Text

Command

Possible responses AT*ESTKSIMT: <text>, <codetype>

Description: Displays a text string to be used by the ME as standby mode text. Defined values:

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 244 of 272

<text> String type NULL

Description Text to be displayed Indicates empty Idle Mode Text string

<codetype> 0 1

Description SMS default alphabet UCS2 alphabet

Response: The AT*ESTKRES terminal response for this command requires you to enter the code type that was sent in the unsolicited message as a parameter in the reply. AT*ESTKRES=16,<result>,<codetype>
<result> 0 16 18 32 Description Command performed successfully Proactive SIM/USIM session terminated successfully No response from user Host currently unable to process command (require <result2>)

17.4.14

*ESTKDTMF Send DTMF tone

Command

Possible responses AT*ESTKDTMF [<alphaid>], [<DTMFstring>], [<codetype>]

Description: The DTMF Tones will be played in the earpiece. The host will display the text passed in the proactive command to the screen if present. There is no AT*ESTKRES reply message required for this command. The Terminal Response will be sent automatically when all the tones have been played. Defined values:
<alphaid> String type NULL Description Text message to be displayed during tone Indicates an empty alphaid

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 245 of 272

<DTMFstring> String type

Description String representative of DTMF sequence to be played

<codetype> 0 1

Description SMS default alphabet UCS2 alphabet

Response:

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 246 of 272

18

Supplementary Services
18.1 AT+COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation

Description Request connected line identification presentation

Command AT+COLP=[<n>]

Possible Responses OK ERROR

Show the current setting

AT+COLP?

<n>,<m> OK ERROR

+COLP:

Test if the command is supported

AT+COLP=?

+COLP: (list of supported <n>s) OK ERROR

Description: This command refers to the GSM/UMTS supplementary service COLP (Connected Line Identification Presentation) that enables a calling subscriber to get the connected line identity (COL) of the called party after setting up a mobile originated call. The command enables or disables the presentation of the COLP at the TE. It has no effect on the execution of the supplementary service COLR in the network. Read command gives the status of <n>, and also triggers an interrogation of the provision status of the COLP service according 3GPP TS 22.081 (given in <m>). Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value. Defined values:
<n> 0 1 Description Enable. Default value. Disable

<m> 0 1 2

Description COLP not provisioned COLP provisioned unknown (e.g. no network, etc.)

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 247 of 272

18.1.1

+COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation Unsolicited Response

Description: When enabled (and allowed by the called subscriber), COLP intermediate result code is returned from the TA to the TE before any +CR or V.25ter responses in the following format: +COLP: <number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype> [,<alpha>]] 18.2 AT+CACM Accumulated Call Meter

Description Reset the ACM

Command AT+CACM=[<passwd>]

Possible Responses +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

(Accumulated Call Meter) value on the SIM

Show the current value

AT+CACM?

+CACM: <acm> +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Tests if the command is supported

AT+CACM=?

ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

+CME

Description: Resets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter value in SIM file EFACM. ACM contains the total number of home units for both the current and preceding calls. SIM PIN2 is usually required to reset the value. If setting fails an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. See +CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code). Note: This command is only valid for line 1 irrespective of the *ELIN command settings. Read command returns the current value of ACM. Defined values:

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 248 of 272

<passwd> String type

Description SIM-PIN2

<acm> String type

Description <ccm> under +CAOC Accumulated call meter value similarly coded as

18.3

AT+CAMM

Accumulated Call Meter Maximum

Description Set command sets

Command AT+CAMM=[<acmmax> [,<passwd>]]

Possible +CME

Responses ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

the Advice of Charge related accumulated value in SIM file EFACMmax value Read the current call meter maximum

AT+CAMM?

+CAMM: <acmmax> +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Test if the command if supported

AT+CAMM=?

ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

+CME

Description: Sets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter maximum value in SIM file EFACMmax. ACMmax contains the maximum number of home units allowed to be consumed by the subscriber. When ACM (refer +CACM) reaches ACMmax calls are prohibited (see also 3GPP 22.024). SIM PIN2 is usually required to set the value. If setting fails an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. Read command returns the current value of ACMmax. Defined values:

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 249 of 272

<acmmax> String type

Description Accumulated call meter maximum value similarly coded as <ccm> under +CAOC; value zero disables ACMmax feature

<passwd> String type

Description SIM PIN2

18.4

AT+CAOC

Advice of Charge

Description Execute command

Command AT+CAOC[=<mode>]

Possible Responses +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR [+CAOC: <ccm>]

Show the current setting

AT+CAOC?

+CAOC: <mode> OK ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CAOC=?

[+CAOC: (list of supported OK ERROR <mode>s]

Description: Use of Advice of Charge supplementary service command enables the subscriber to get information about the cost of calls. With <mode>=0, the execute command returns the current call meter value from the ME. The command also includes the possibility to enable an unsolicited event reporting of the CCM information. The unsolicited result code +CCCM: <ccm> is sent when the CCM value changes, but no more than every 10 seconds. Deactivation of the unsolicited event reporting is made with the same command. Read command indicates whether the unsolicited reporting is activated or not. Read command is available when the unsolicited result code is supported. Defined Values:
<mode> 0 Description Query CCM value (default)

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 250 of 272

<mode> 1 2

Description Deactivate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value Activate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value

18.4.1

+CCCM Response

Current Call Meter Unsolicited

Description: An Unsolicited Response indicating the accumulated charge as computed by the MS, expressed in terms of Home units. AT+CAOC is used to activate or deactivate the reporting of CCM. +CCCM: <ccm> Defined values:

<ccm> string type

Description Three bytes of the current call meter value in hexadecimal format (e.g. 00001E indicates decimal coded as ACMmax value in the SIM. value 30); value is in home units and bytes are similarly

18.5

AT+CPUC

Price Per Unit and Currency Table

Description Set command sets the parameters of Advice of Charge related price per unit and currency table in SIM file EFPUCT Shows the current values

Command AT+CPUC=<currency>, <ppu>[,<passwd>]

Possible Responses +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

AT+CPUC?

+CPUC: <currency>,<ppu> +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Shows if the command is supported

AT+CPUC=?

OK ERROR

Description: PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 251 of 272

Sets the parameters of Advice of Charge related price per unit and currency table in SIM file EFPUCT. PUCT information can be used to convert the home units (as used in +CAOC, +CACM and +CAMM) into currency units. SIM SIM PIN2 is required to set the parameters. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. Read command returns the current parameters of PUCT. For information on the character set see AT+CSCS in the Short Message Services section. Defined values:
<currency> String Description Alpha-identifier of the currency code (3 characters, e.g. SEK)

<ppu> String type

Description price per unit; dot is used as a decimal separator (e.g. 2.66)

<passwd> String type

Description SIM PIN2

18.6

AT+CCFC

Call Forwarding number and Conditions

Description Request Calling forwarding number and

Syntax AT+CCFC=<reas on> ber s> ,<mode>[,<num >[,<type>[,<clas [,<subaddr>[,<sa type>[,<time>]]]] ]]

Possible Responses +CME ERROR <err> when <mode>=2 and command successful: +CCFC: er>,

conditions

<status>,<class1>[,<numb <type>[,<subaddr>[,<satyp e>[,<time>]]]][<CR><LF> +CCFC: er>, > <status>,<class2>[,<numb <type>[,subaddr>[,<satype [,<timer>]]]] []] OK

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 252 of 272

Description Test if the command is supported

Syntax AT+CCFC=?

Possible Responses ERROR + CCFC: (list of supported <reason>s) +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR

Description: This command allows control of the call forwarding supplementary service. Registration, erasure, activation, deactivation, and status query are supported. When querying the status of a network service (<mode>=2) the response line for 'not active' case (<status>=0) is returned only if service is not active for any <class>. Defined Values:
<reason> 0 1 2 3 4 5 Description Unconditional Mobile busy No reply Not reachable All call forwarding (refer to 3GPP TS 22.030) All conditional call forwarding (refer to 3GPP TS 22.030)

<mode> 0 1 2 3 4

Description Disable Enable Query status Registration Erasure

<number> String type

Description String type phone number of forwarding address in format specified by <type>

<type> 129

Description ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national /

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 253 of 272

<type>

Description international unknown Default setting if + is not in <sca>

145 161 128255

ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number Default setting if '+' is in <sca> ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number Other values refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7

<status> 0 1

Description Not active Active

18.7

AT+CCWA Call Waiting Notes: * - Query operation requires SIM (<mode> = 2). ** - Mode and Class are not parameter settings (value <n> only). *** - Query operation is not available in CFUN mode 4 (<mode> = 2).
Description Request call waiting Command AT+CCWA=[<n> [,<mode> [,<class>]]] Possible Responses when<mode>=2 and command successful: CR><LF> +CCWA: +CCWA:<status>,<class1>[<

<status>,<class2>[]] +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR Show the current setting AT+CCWA? +CME ERROR <err> OK ERROR Test if the command is AT+CCWA=? +CCWA: (list of supported <n>s) OK ERROR +CME ERROR <err> +CCWA: <n>

supported

Description: PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 254 of 272

This command allows control of the call waiting supplementary service according to 3GPP TS 22.083. Activation, deactivation and status query are supported. When querying the status of a network service (<mode>=2) the response line for not active case (<status>=0) should be returned only if service is not active for any <class>. Parameter <n> is used to disable or enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CCWA: <number>,<type>,<class>,[<alpha>][,<CLI validity>] to the TE when call waiting service is enabled. The command is abortable when the network is interrogated. The interaction of this command with other commands based on other GSM/UMTS supplementary services is described in the GSM/UMTS standards. Defined values:
<n> 0 1 Description Disable. Default value. Enable

<mode> 0 1 2

Description Disable Enable Query status

<classx> integer 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128

Description Sum of integers each representing a class of information. Default value = 7 (1+2+4) Voice L1 Data Fax Short message service Data circuit sync Data circuit async Dedicated packet access Dedicated PAD access

<status> 0 1

Description Not active Active

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 255 of 272

<number> String type

Description format specified by <type> String type ME number of forwarding address in

<type> Integer format

Description Type of address octet in integer format (GSM 04.08 10.5.4.7)

<err> 0 3 4 21 30 31 100

Description ME failure Operation not allowed Operation not supported Invalid index No network service Network timeout Unknown

Example: AT+CCWA=? +CCWA: (0-1) OK AT+CCWA? +CCWA: 0 OK 18.7.1 +CCWA Unsolicited Result Code:

+CCWA: <number>, <type>, <class> 18.8 AT+CLIP Calling Line Identification Notes: * - Query (AT+CLIP?) does not operate in CFUN mode 4.

Description Set calling line identification

Command AT+CLIP=<n>

Possible Responses +CME ERROR: <err> OK

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 256 of 272

Description Shows the current setting

Command AT+CLIP?

Possible Responses ERROR +CLIP: <n>,<m> +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Test if the command is supported

AT+CLIP=?

supported <n>s) +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

+CLIP: (list of

Description: This command refers to the GSM supplementary service CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) that enables a called subscriber to get the calling line identity (CLI) of the calling party when receiving a mobile terminated call. Set command enables or disables the presentation of the CLI at the TE. It has no effect on the execution of the supplementary service CLIP in the network. When the presentation of the CLI at the TE is enabled (and calling subscriber allows), the unsolicited response, +CLIP, is sent for every incoming call. Read command gives the status of <n> and also triggers an interrogation of the provision status of the CLIP service according to GSM 02.81 (given in <m>). This command is abortable. Defined values:
<n> 0 1 Description Disable. Default value. Enable

<m> 0 1 2

Description CLIP not provisioned CLIP provisioned Unknown (e.g. no network)

The data affected by this command is contained in the User Profile.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 257 of 272

18.8.1

+CLIP Response

Calling Line Identification Unsolicited

The unsolicited response, enabled/disabled by AT+CLIP, reports the caller ID of any incoming call. Format: +CLIP: <number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype>[,[<alpha>] [,<CLI_validity>]]] When CLI is not available ( <CLI validity>=2), <number> shall be an empty string ("") and <type> value will not be significant. When CLI has been withheld by the originator, (<CLI validity>=1) and the CLIP is provisioned with the "override category" option (refer 3GPP TS 22.081 and 3GPP TS 23.081), <number> and <type> is provided. Otherwise, the module will return the same setting for <number> and <type> as if the CLI was not available.
<number> String type Description String type phone number of format specified by <type>

<type> Integer format

Description 04.08 sub-clause 10.5.4.7) Type of address octet in integer (refer to GSM

<subaddr> String type

Description String type subaddress of format specified by <satype>

<satype> Integer format

Description TS 4.08 subclause 10.5.4.8) Type of subaddress octet in integer format (refer

<alpha> String type

Description String type alphanumeric representation of <number> corresponding to the entry found in phonebook; used Select TE Character Set AT+CSCS character set should be the one selected with command

<CLI_validity> 0

Description CLI is valid

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 258 of 272

<CLI_validity> 1 2

Description CLI has been withheld by originator CLI is not available due to interworking problems or limitations of originating network

Example: AT+CLIP=1 OK RING +CLIP: 07747008670,129,,,Matt L,0 18.9 AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction Notes: * - Query (AT+CLIR?) does not operate in CFUN mode 4.

Description Request calling line identification restriction

Command AT+CLIR=[<n>]

Possible Responses <err> OK ERROR +CME ERROR:

Read the current setting

AT+CLIR?

<n>,<m> +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

+CLIR:

Test if the command is supported

AT+CLIR=?

+CLIR: (list of supported <n>s) <err> OK ERROR

+CME ERROR:

Description: This command refers to CLIR-service according to 3GPP TS 22.081 that allows a calling subscriber to enable or disable the presentation of the CLI to the called party when originating a call. Set command overrides the CLIR subscription (default is restricted or allowed) when temporary mode is provisioned as a default adjustment for all following outgoing calls. Using the opposite command can revoke this adjustment. If this command is used by a PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 259 of 272

subscriber without provision of CLIR in permanent mode the network will act according 3GPP TS 22.081. The setting shall be per logical channel. Set command directly writes to non-volatile memory so that the setting is preserved also after turning off/on the MS. The &F command will not affect the setting. Read command gives the default adjustment for all outgoing calls (given in <n>), and also triggers an interrogation of the provision status of the CLIR service (given in <m>). Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value. This command is not abortable. Defined values:
<n> 0 1 2 Description the CLIR service. Default value. CLIR invocation CLIR suppression Presentation indicator is used according to the subscription of

<m> 0 1 2 3 4

Description CLIR not provisioned CLIR provisioned in permanent mode Unknown (e.g. no network) CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted CLIR temporary mode presentation allowed

18.10

AT+CSSN

Supplementary Service Notification

Description Presentation of

Command AT+CSSN=[<n>[,<m>]]

Possible

Responses <err> OK ERROR +CME ERROR:

notification result codes from TA to TE

Read the current setting

AT+CSSN?

+CSSN: <n>,<m> +CME ERROR: <err> OK

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 260 of 272

Description

Command

Possible Responses ERROR +CSSN: (list of supported supported <m>s) <err> OK ERROR <n>s), (list of

Test if the

command is supported

AT+CSSN=?

+CME ERROR:

Description: This command refers to supplementary service related network initiated notifications. The set command enables or disables the presentation of notification result codes from TA to TE. When <n>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received after a mobile originated call setup, unsolicited result code +CSSI: <code1> [,<index>] is sent to TE before any other MO call setup result codes presented in this manual or in V.25ter. When several different <code1>s are received from the network, each of them shall have its own +CSSI result code. When <m>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received during a mobile terminated call setup or during a call, or when a forward check supplementary service notification is received, unsolicited result code +CSSU: <code2>[,<index>] is sent to TE. In case of MT call setup, result code is sent after every +CLIP result code (refer command Calling line identification presentation +CLIP) and when several different <code2>s are received from the network, each of them shall have its own +CSSU result code. Defined values:
<n> 0 1 Description Default value. Disable the +CSSI result code presentation status in the TA.

Enable the +CSSI result code presentation status in the TA

<m> 0 1

Description Disable the +CSSU result code presentation status in the TA. Default value. Enable the +CSSU result code presentation status in the TA

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 261 of 272

<code1> 0 1 2 3 5 6 7 8

Description Unconditional call forwarding is active Some of the conditional call forwarding are active Call has been forwarded Call is waiting Outgoing calls are barred Incoming calls are barred CLIR suppression rejected Call has been deflected

<code2> 0 2 3 4 5 6 7

Description This is a forwarded call (MT call setup) Call has been put on hold (during a voice call) Call has been retrieved (during a voice call) Multiparty call entered (during a voice call) Call on hold has been released (this is not a SS notification) (during a voice call) whenever) Forward check SS message received (can be received

alerting state in explicit call transfer operation (during a voice call) Call has been connected with the other remote party in explicit call transfer operation (also number and or MT call setup)

Call is being connected (alerting) with the remote party in

subaddress parameters may be present) (during a voice call

This is a deflected call (MT call setup)

18.10.1

+CSSI

Supplementary Services Notification

Description: The +CSSI unsolicited message is enabled or disabled by the AT+CSSN command. Unsolicited response format: +CSSI: <code>[,<index>] Defined values:
<code> 0 1 Description Unconditional Call Forwarding is active Some of the conditional call forwardings are active

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 262 of 272

<code> 2 3 5 6 7 16

Description A call has been forwarded A call is waiting Outgoing calls are barred Incoming calls are barred CLIR suppression is rejected This is a CUG call (CUG index indicated in <cindex>)

<cindex> 0...32767

Description CUG index

18.10.2

+CSSU Supplementary Services Notification

Description: The +CSSU unsolicited message is enabled or disabled by the AT+CSSN command. When enabled, the message is of the following form: +CSSU: <code>[,<cindex>] Defined values:
<code> 0 2 3 4 5 6 16 Description This is a forwarded call A call has been put on hold (during voice call) A call has been retrieved (during voice call) A multi-party call has been entered (during voice call) The call on hold has been released (during voice call) (this is not a SS notification) Forward check SS messages This is a CUG call (index specified by <cindex>) (MT call setup)

<cindex> 0...32767

Description CUG index

18.11 AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data Notes: * - Only the <n> parameter. <str> is not a parameter setting. ** - Mobile initiated USSD will not operate in CFUN mode 4.

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 263 of 272

Description Request unstructured service data Show the supplementary

Command AT+CUSD=[<n>[,<str>[,<dcs>]]]

Possible Responses +CME ERROR: <err> OK

current setting

AT+CUSD?

<n> OK

+CUSD:

ERROR Test if the command is supported AT+CUSD=? +CUSD: (list of <n>s) OK ERROR supported

Description: This command allows control of the Unstructured Supplementary Service Data (USSD) according to 3GPP TS 22.090. Both network and mobile initiated operations are supported. Parameter <n> is used to disable/enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code (USSD response from the network, or network initiated operation) +CUSD: <m>[,<str>,<dcs>] to the TE. In addition, value <n>=2 is used to cancel an ongoing USSD session. If <n> is not given then the default value 0 is taken. When <str> is given, a mobile initiated USSD string or a response USSD string to a network initiated operation is sent to the network. The response USSD string from the network is returned in a subsequent unsolicited +CUSD: result code. The interaction of this command with other commands based on other GSM supplementary services is described in the GSM standard. Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value. Some different scenarios are shown below: 1. An incoming network initiated USSD-Notify should be presented to the external application as an unsolicited result code +CUSD: if the external application has enabled result code presentation. 2. An incoming USSD-request asking for a reply should sent to the external application as an unsolicited result code +CUSD: if the external application has enabled result code. 3. If the external application answers to the request with the command AT+CUSD then the ME sends the answer to the network. PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B Page 264 of 272

3b. A USSD-request sent with the command AT+CUSD from the external application. The different alternatives are shown below.
Network 1 Signal Mobile Equipment Sends unsolicited result code +CUSD 2 asking for reply 3 3b Signal External application Result code presentation Result code

enabled, presented presentation

Sends unsolicited result code +CUSD

enabled, presented Answer AT+CUSD Sends AT+CUSD

Defined values:
<n> 0 1 2 Description Disable result code presentation in the TA. Default value. Enable result code presentation in the TA the read command response (not supported) Terminate (abort) USSD dialogue. This value is not applicable to

<str> string type - if <dcs> indicates that 3GPP TS 23.038 7 bit default alphabet is used:

Description not given, network is not interrogated) String type USSD (when <str> parameter is

- if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer command Select TE Character Set +CSCS): ME/TA converts GSM alphabet into current TS 27.005 Annex A.

TE character set according to rules of 3GPP - if TE character set is "HEX": ME/TA converts each 7-bit character of GSM alphabet into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (IRA 49 and 55))

(e.g. character P (GSM 23) is presented as 17 - if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit data used: coding scheme is ME/TA converts each 8-bit octet into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 265 of 272

<dcs> Integer type

Description 3GPP TS 23.038 [25] Cell Broadcast Data Coding Scheme in integer format (default 0)

Example: AT+CUSD=1,*34# OK +CUSD:1,"id code" AT+CUSD=0,"7465338" OK Example: +CUSD:0,Expensive incoming call Example: AT+CUSD=1,*55*0700# OK +CUSD:0,ALARM Example: AT+CUSD=1,*#100# OK +CUSD: 0,07787154042 18.11.1 +CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Unsolicited Response Description: Unsolicited response reporting changes in USSD status. Format: +CUSD: <m>[,<str>,<dcs>] See AT+CUSD, for more details. Defined values:
<m> 0 Description no further user action required (network initiated USSD-Notify, or no further information needed after mobile initiated operation) 1 2

further user action required (network initiated USSD-Request, or further information needed after mobile initiated operation) service release request). This result code is not generated if the dialogue terminates with a result code where <m> is equal to zero (0). USSD dialogue terminated (due to network supplementary

Other I/O client has responded. This parameter value is not

applicable to GM 12. This result code is received if the network initiates a USSD dialogue and some other I/O client responds. The client that responds first receives the dialogue. Clients that

try to respond after this notification has been generated, will

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 266 of 272

<m> 4 5

Description get a result code ERROR. operation not supported network time out

<str> String type

Description String type USSD-string (when <str> parameter is not given, network is not interrogated)

If <dcs> indicates 7 bit default

that 3GPP TS 23.038 alphabet is used: If <dcs> indicates that 8-bit data used: coding scheme is

Further user action required (network initiated USSD-Request, or further operation) information needed after mobile initiated ME/TA converts each 8-bit octet into two IRA character long hexadecimal number presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)) (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is

<dcs> Integer type

Description 3GPP TS 23.038 [25] Cell Broadcast Data Coding Scheme in integer format (default 0)

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 267 of 272

19

Alternate Line Services


19.1 AT*ECSP Customer Service Profile

Description Read the customer service profile from the SIM

Command AT*ECSP=<service group>

Possible Responses *ECSP: <service group>,<services> +CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Test if the

command is supported

AT*ECSP=?

+CME ERROR: <err> OK ERROR

Description: This command is used to read the customer service profile (CSP) from the SIM. CSP is a list on the SIM, which indicates the services that are user accessible. Each of the services has a related bit within the CSP. The services are grouped into service groups, with a maximum of 8 services in a group. For each service group, a bit mask tells which services are available (bit=1). Unused bits are set to 0. Defined values:
<service group> Integer type 1-9, 192-255 Description The service group code of the service group to read

<services> Integer type 0-255

Description Decimal representation of a Bit mask (8 bits), Bit=0: unused or unavailable service Bit=1: available service indicating the services within the service group

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 268 of 272

20

Alphabetic Listing of AT Commands

Provided below is an alphabetic list of all AT Commands by section and page number.
Command or Unsolicited Response Section Page

+CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code) +CMS ERROR (Message Service Failure Result Code) Abortability AT Attention Command AT +CMMS More Messages to Send AT&C Circuit 109 (DCD) Control AT&D Circuit 108 (DTR) Response AT&F Set to Factory Defined Configuration Profile AT&W Store Configuration Profile AT* List all Supported AT Commands AT*E2CMGA Modify message attribute AT*E2EMM Engineering Monitoring Mode AT*E2RESET Restart Module AT*E2SSN SIM Serial Number AT*ECAM Call Monitoring AT*ECSP Customer Service Profile AT*EIAAUR - Internet Account Configuration, Read Authentication Parameters AT*EIAAUW - Internet Account Configuration, Write Authentication Parameters AT*EIAC - Internet Account, Create AT*EIACSR - Internet Account Configuration, Read CSD Bearer Capabilities AT*EIACSW - Internet Account Configuration, Write CSD Bearer Capabilities AT*EIAD - Internet Account Configuration, Delete AT*EIAIPCPR - Internet Account Configuration, Read PPP Parameters - IPCP AT*EIAIPCPW - Internet Account Configuration, Write PPP Parameters - IPCP AT*EIALCPR - Internet Account Configuration, Read PPP Parameters - LCP AT*EIALCPW - Internet Account Configuration, Write PPP Parameters - LCP AT*EIALSR - Internet Account Configuration, Read Link Socket Parameters AT*EIALSW - Internet Account Configuration, Write Link Socket Parameters AT*EIAPSR - Internet Account Configuration, Read PS Bearer Parameters AT*EIAPSW - Internet Account Configuration, Write PS Bearer Parameters AT*EIAR - Internet Account Configuration, Read General PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

3.15 3.17 1.7 10.1 14.10 11.1 11.2 5.1 5.2 3.12 14.17 12.1 4.2 16.4 3.23 19.1 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.11 9.12 9.7 9.8 9.9 9.10 9.14 9.13 9.15

38 42 13 146 198 153 153 57 64 36 211 160 55 223 49 273 113 114 116 117 119 121 129 131 122 124 127 128 135 133 137

Page 269 of 272

Command or Unsolicited Response

Section

Page

Parameters AT*EIARUTD - Internet Account Configuration, Delete Routing Table Parameters AT*EIARUTR - Internet Account Configuration, Read Routing Table Parameters AT*EIARUTW - Internet Account Configuration, Write Routing Table Parameters AT*EIAW - Internet Account Configuration, Write General Parameters AT*EMWI Message Waiting Indication AT*ENAP USB Ethernet Interface Control AT*EPEE Pin Event AT*EPIN Additional PIN Information AT*ERINFO Network Capability AT*ESTKMENU Menu Selection AT*ESTKRES Terminal Response AT*ESTKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings AT*EUPLINK Send Uplink Data AT+CACM Accumulated Call Meter AT+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum AT+CAOC Advice of Charge AT+CBST Select Bearer Service Type AT+CCFC Call Forwarding number and Conditions AT+CCLK Set Clock and Date AT+CCWA Call Waiting AT+CEAP EAP Authentication AT+CEER Extended Error Report AT+CERP EAP Retrieve Parameters AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach AT+CGCLASS GPRS Mobile Station Class AT+CGCMOD PDP Context Modify AT+CGDATA Enter Data State AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context AT+CGDSCONT Define Secondary PDP Context AT+CGEQMIN 3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) AT+CGEQNEG 3G Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated) AT+CGEQREQ 3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested) AT+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting AT+CGMI Read MS Manufacturer Identification AT+CGMM Read MS Model Identification AT+CGMR Read Revision Identification AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable) AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested) PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

9.19 9.17 9.18 9.16 15.2 8.17 16.3 16.6 12.2 17.1 17.2 17.3 8.18 18.2 18.3 18.4 7.1 18.6 6.1 18.7 16.7 3.10 16.8 4.1 8.1 8.3 8.4 8.2 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.10 8.11 8.12 8.8 10.2 10.3 10.4 8.9 8.13 8.14

143 139 141 138 215 110 222 224 167 230 230 233 111 253 254 255 67 257 66 259 225 33 227 54 71 72 73 72 74 76 78 83 91 95 80 146 146 147 82 101 102

Page 270 of 272

Command or Unsolicited Response

Section

Page

AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages AT+CGSN Read Product Serial Number Identification AT+CGTFT Traffic Flow Template AT+CHUP Hang up Call AT+CIMI Subscriber Identification AT+CIND Indicator Control AT+CLAC List All Available AT Commands AT+CLCC List Current Calls AT+CLCK Facility Lock AT+CLIP Calling Line Identification AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction AT+CMAR Master Reset AT+CMEE Mobile Equipment Error AT+CMER Mobile Equipment Event Reporting AT+CMGC Send Command AT+CMGD Delete Message AT+CMGF Message Format AT+CMGL List Message AT+CMGR Read Message AT+CMGS Send Message AT+CMGW Write Message to Memory AT+CMSS Send From Storage AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE AT+CNUM Subscriber Number AT+COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation AT+COPN Read Operator Names AT+COPS Operator Selection AT+CPAS Phone Activity Status AT+CPBR Phonebook Read AT+CPBS Phonebook Storage Select AT+CPBW Phonebook Write AT+CPIN PIN Control AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage AT+CPOL Preferred Operator List AT+CPUC Price Per Unit and Currency Table AT+CPWD Change Password AT+CR Service Reporting Control AT+CRC Cellular Result Code AT+CREG Network Registration AT+CRES Restore SMS Settings AT+CRLP Radio Link Protocol AT+CRSM Restricted SIM Access AT+CSAS Save SMS Settings AT+CSCA Service Centre Address AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Type AT+CSCS Select Character Set AT+CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

8.15 103 14.1 187 10.5 147 8.16 106 2.10 24 16.5 223 3.11 33 3.13 36 2.11 25 12.3 168 18.8 262 18.9 264 4.3 55 3.14 37 3.16 40 14.4 189 14.7 193 14.2 187 14.8 194 14.9 196 14.5 191 14.3 188 14.6 192 14.11 198 12.4 171 18.1 252 12.5 173 12.6 174 3.18 43 13.1 181 13.2 183 13.3 184 16.2 220 14.12 204 12.7 176 18.5 256 3.19 45 3.20 46 3.21 47 12.8 178 14.18 212 7.2 68 16.1 217 14.19 212 14.13 206 15.1 214 14.14 207 14.15 208 Page 271 of 272

Command or Unsolicited Response

Section

Page

AT+CSMS Select Message Service AT+CSQ Signal Strength AT+CSSN Supplementary Service Notification AT+CUAD UICC Application Discovery AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data AT+GCAP Capabilities AT+GMI Request Manufacturer Identification AT+GMM Request Model Identification AT+GMR Revision Identification AT+ICF DTE-DCE Character Framing Format AT+IFC DTE-DCE Local Flow Control AT+IPR Cable Interface Port baud rate ATA Answer Incoming Call ATD Dial ATD Extension (*98) - Request Packet Domain IP Service ATD Extension (*99) - Request Packet Domain Service ATE Command Echo ATH Hang up ATI Identification Information ATO Return to Online Data Mode ATP Select Pulse dialing ATQ Result Code Suppression ATS0 Automatic Answer Control ATS10 Automatic Disconnect Delay Control ATS2 Escape Sequence Character ATS3 Command Line Termination Character ATS4 Response Formatting Character ATS5 Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE) ATS6 Blind Dial Delay Control ATS7 Connection Completion Timeout ATS8 Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control ATT Select Tone Dialing ATV DCE Response Format ATX Call Progress Monitoring Control ATZ Restore Configuration Profile

14.16 3.22 18.10 16.9 18.11 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9 11.4 11.5 11.6 2.1 2.2 2.4 2.3 11.7 2.5 10.10 2.6 2.7 11.8 3.1 3.9 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 2.8 11.3 2.9 5.3

209 49 265 228 269 148 148 149 149 155 156 157 15 15 20 19 158 22 150 22 23 159 28 32 28 29 30 30 31 31 32 23 154 23 65

PC300 AT Command Manual 4/159 35-5/FCP 101 4577 Uen Rev B

Page 272 of 272

You might also like